Unigraphics Nx Student Manual
Short Description
Download Unigraphics Nx Student Manual...
Description
UNIGRAPHICS
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS OF UNIGRAPHICS STUDENT MANUAL September 2002 MT10050 - Unigraphics NX
EDS Inc.
Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices
Copyright Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. 2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved. Restricted Rights Legend The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress, CA 90630. Warranties and Liabilities All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties. The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document. The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein. Trademarks EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONS, UNIGRAPHICS, GRIP, PARASOLID, UG, UG/..., UG SOLUTIONS, iMAN are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
Practical Application of Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History: Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
February 1999 January 2000 December 2000 September 2001 September 2002
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -2 -3 -3 -4 -4 -5 -5 -6
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Site Specific Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cue/Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu bar pull down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Change The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse PopĆup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Selection Candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-9 1-11 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-24 1-25 1-27 1-30 1-30 1-32 1-34 1-34
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
i
Table of Contents
ii
Drafting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection Filter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics . Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling
1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-41 1-43
Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic WCS Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origin, Edge Lengths Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter, Height Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-23 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Horizontal and Vertical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
3-8 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-21 Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 3-24 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-33 3-34 3-38 3-38 3-39
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5
Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Thickness Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset . . .
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-9
Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation . . . . . . . . .
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-6 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-13
Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 7-2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Inspect the Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All by Reference . . . . . . . . . Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Used by option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8
Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SubĆAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TopĆDown Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BottomĆUp Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combining Both Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Up Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fully Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partially Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Work Part icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LeftĆRight UpĆDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-13 8-13 8-15 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-20 8-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Point to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component . . . .
8-20 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25
The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 The Master Model Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . 9-6 Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . 9-12 Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses of the Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button Specific Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . Creating Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associativity of Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Utility Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions . . . Dimension Local Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appended Text Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDS All Rights Reserved
10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-5 10-7 10-10 10-10 10-11 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-18 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-20 10-21 10-22 10-29 10-30 10-31 10-32 10-33 10-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
v
Table of Contents
Precision Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrow Line and Extension Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leader Direction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Justification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating text Without a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Text with a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Existing Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-35 10-36 10-37 10-39 10-40 10-41 10-42 10-44 10-48 10-49 10-50 10-50 10-51 10-52 10-52 10-53
Datum Plane Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Datum Plane User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Dual Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Offset Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Center Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis . . . 11-9 Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Datum Plane Through Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Selecting and Using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Editing Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Deleting Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . 11-21 Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . . . . . 11-27 Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . 11-33 Datum Axis Reference Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 vi
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces . . . . . Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-10 12-19
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 What is a sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Why sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 When should a sketch be used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Sketches and the Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 The Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch to Define the Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Defining the Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Naming a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch for a Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Activity 1 - Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Sketch Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Sketch Curve Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Infer Constraints Setting Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Locking a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 The Infer Point Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Alignment Lines While Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27 Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39 EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
vii
Table of Contents
Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42 Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43 Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48 Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . 13-55 Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Creating Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Dimensional Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Editing Dimensional Constraints` . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67 Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69 Displaying Constraint Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73 Constraint Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Listing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Dragging Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraining Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78 Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80 Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89 Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100 Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101 Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Swept Features from Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules for Extruding Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4 Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Extrusion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Activity 1 - Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Defining Target and Tool Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Swept Feature Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Rules for Extruding With Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Extruding With Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Sweep along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide 14-19 Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Rules for Revolving Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Body of Revolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 Trimming Face Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face . . . . . . . . . 14-35 Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39 Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delayed Update on Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delta X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Between Two Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSYS to CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDS All Rights Reserved
15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-5 15-5 15-5 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ix
Table of Contents
x
Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Dimension Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions . . Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress and Unsuppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorder Before/After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Dependency Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator . . . . . . Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Reattach Menu dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reattach Menu dialog box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-9 15-10 15-11 15-15 15-17 15-27 15-28 15-29 15-30 15-30 15-30 15-31 15-35 15-38 15-39 15-40 15-40 15-40 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-43 15-44 15-46 15-46 15-48 15-50
Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-9 A-10 A-12 A-14 A-16 A-18 A-20 A-22 A-24 A-26 A-28 A-30 A-32 A-34
Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon Methods To Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inferred Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Existing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle on Arc/Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quadrant Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylindrical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spherical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 B-14 B-14
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
xi
Table of Contents
Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformation Options Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Through a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry . . . . . .
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-6 C-7 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13
Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Explicit Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 The Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Basic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 The Dialog Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 PreĆSelection Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Inferred Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Status Line Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Inferred Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 General Curve Creation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 String Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 Line Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis . . . . . . . D-11 Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D-14 Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16 Line Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17 Activity 1 - Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27 Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27 xii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Dialog Bar Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Point, Point on Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Circle Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet Creation Methods Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an Arc or Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Parameters Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Dragging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-27 D-28 D-28 D-29 D-32 D-33 D-34 D-35 D-36 D-37 D-40 D-41 D-45 D-46 D-46 D-47 D-47 D-47 D-48 D-49 D-49 D-50
WCS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1 E-1
Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
xiii
Table of Contents
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
xiv
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Course Overview Intended Audience This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers, application programmers, NC programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and system managers who have a need for understanding and using Unigraphics software.
Course Objectives After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
Apply the standards used in class.
Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory.
Open and examine models.
Create and edit parametric solid models.
Create and modify basic assembly structures.
Create and modify simple drawings.
Modify existing geometry.
Prerequisites There are no prerequisites for this class.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
-1
Course Overview
How to Use This Manual It is important that you use the Student Manual in the sequence presented because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught in an earlier lesson. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous activity where a method or technique was originally taught. The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. As your knowledge of Unigraphics increases, the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed to accomplish a given task. Step 1 Open part file pau_topic_1.
From the menu bar, select File
Choose Open.
Double-click on the parts sub-directory.
Select the file pau_topic_1 and choose OK.
Classroom System Information Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the classroom: Student Login:
Username: Password:
Home Directory: Parts Directory: Instructor: Date:
-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Class Standards The following standards will be used in this class. Standardization allows users to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others . All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
About Part File Naming In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the user to open a part file, the user community must establish standard names for the various files associated with the part definition. The following is a sample usage of a filenaming standard: revision (4 characters)
part name (25 characters)
xxx_xxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxx_xxxx•prt identifier (3 characters)
TIP
configuration (4 characters)
extension (4 characters)
Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four character extension (.prt) is automatically added to define the file type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters for the file name is actually 124.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
-3
Course Overview
Class Part File Naming This course utilizes the following filenaming standard: underscore delimiter
unique identifier number
part name
pau_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _ x • p r t course identifier (3 characters)
underscore delimiter
extension (4 characters)
Where the student is requested to save a part file for later use, the initials of the student's given name, middle name, and surname replace the course identifier pau" in the new filename with the remainder of the filename matching the original.
Expressions The student will notice that there is a standard set of expressions resident in each of the part files as follows: Expression Name
Intended Use
bend_r=.5
identifies bend radius for sheet metal parts
dia=.5
identifies diameter
h=1
identifies height
l=1
identifies length
out_r=.625
identifies the outside radius for sheet metal parts
rad=.25
identifies Radius
thk=.06
identifies thickness
w=1
identifies width
These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a standard expression file that could be imported into the part file by the user. Expression files that are valid for importing carry the file extension of .exp. The total number of characters allowed in an expression is 132.
-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Colors The following colors are preset to indicate different object types: Object
Valid colors
Bodies Solid Sheet
Green Yellow
Generating Curves (nonĆsketch) Lines and Arcs Conics and Splines
Orange Blue
Sketches Sketch Curves Reference Curves
Cyan Gray
Datum Features
Aquamarine
Points and Coordinate Systems
White
System Display Color
Red
Seed Part Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any settings that are partĆdependent (saved with the part file). This may include nonĆgeometric data such as:
Preferences
Commonly used expressions
Layer categories
UserĆdefined views and layouts
Part attributes
TIP
Once a seed part is established, it should be writeĆprotected to avoid accidental modification of the seed part.
Two seed part files are available for use in this course, pau_seedpart_in for inch parts and pau_seedpart_mm for metric parts. These files incorporate the standards described above, and include the TFRĆTRI view as the default view.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
-5
Course Overview
Definition of Terms Explicit Modeling
Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. Objects are created relative to model space, not each other. Changes to one or more objects do not necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Examples of explicit modeling include creating a line between two existing points, or creating an arc through three existing points. If one of the existing points were moved, the line/arc would not change. Parametric Modeling
A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for the definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing. Parameters may reference each other to establish relationships between the various features of the model. Examples include the diameter and depth of a hole, or the length, width, and height of a rectangular pad. The designer's intent may be that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Linking these parameters together may achieve the desired results. This is not easily accomplished with an explicit model. ConstraintĆbased Modeling
A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven, or solved, from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model as constraints. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such as sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints (such as parallelism or tangency). Examples include a line tangent to an arc, where the designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even though the angle of the line may change, or a perpendicular condition being maintained as angles are modified. Hybrid Modeling
Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types of modeling described above. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use parametric modeling where needed, without requiring that the entire model be constrained before proceeding. Because of this, designers have more flexibility in modeling techniques. The Unigraphics hybrid modeler supports traditional explicit geometric modeling along with constraintĆbased sketching and parametric feature modeling. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination.
-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started Lesson 1
PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics User Interface. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Start Unigraphics.
Locate the Cue/Status line.
Execute Menu Bar Pull Down Menus.
Create a New Part File.
Dock and Undock Toolbars.
Open a Part File.
Work with Layers
Copy a Part File.
Close a Part File and Exit Unigraphics.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-1
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Starting Unigraphics ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ The first step in working in Unigraphics is to log on to a workstation and start a ÉÉÉ Unigraphics process. Because this procedure varies from company to company,
and platform to platform, consult the system administrator for a site specific procedure to follow. The Unigraphics NX Activity Menu shown below will not be displayed on Windows workstations, and may or may not be displayed at Unix workstations. It is shown here to describe the options available in case this is the normal start dialog box at your site.
Unigraphics Site Specific Startup Unigraphics NX Activity Menu Version
Select xwi" to enable the display of curve widths
Select Starbase" to enable rotatable shaded images Select once to start Unigraphics
1-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Unigraphics Windows No Part The graphic below shows the No Part" Unigraphics interface. This interface only allows the user to adjust default options, open an existing part or create a new part in which to work. Menu bar:Ă Use the first mouse button to select an option from the pullĆdown menu
Minimize Help
Internet Explorer & History
Status line
Cue line
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-3
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The Gateway Application Upon opening an existing part or creating a new part in Unigraphics the Gateway application is entered. Gateway allows the review of existing part files and the ability to get information on those files. To create or edit objects within a file, one of the other applications such as Modeling must be entered. Work and displayed part names
Graphics Window Restore Down Resource Bars
Graphics area
Status line: Displays informational messages
Cue line: displays user prompts
1-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 The Cue/Status line appears at the bottom of the main application window. The ÉÉÉ purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction. The purpose of the ÉÉÉ Status line is to give the user feedback about system activity. Cue/Status line
NOTE: In a Windows environment the Cue line can be relocated to the top of the user interface.
Menu bar pull down menus The Menu Bar offers a number of options from which to choose. These options have pullĆdown menus associated with them that allow access to areas of functionality. Holding the first mouse button down over a Menu Bar option causes the pullĆdown menu to display. Arrows to the right of the pullĆdown listing indicate that further cascading options are available.
Cascade Menu
Menu Bar
PullĆDown Menu
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-5
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance Most interaction with dialog boxes is the same on the Windows platform and the Unix platform. The appearance of some of the controls is slightly different as shown in the example below. Notice the variance in the display of the slider bars, check boxes, option menus, etc.. UNIX
Windows 2000
Graphics shown in this text are from a Windows workstation, some of the dialog boxes at your classroom workstation may differ slightly from those shown.
1-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes The New Part File, Open Part File, and Save Part File As dialog boxes have some very useful common features. The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or directory. Selecting the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within the box) will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives.
Choosing anywhere away from the list of the available folders and drives will dismiss the listing without selecting another folder or drive.
The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and files in the currently selected directory. The folder symbol represents a subĆdirectory, Unigraphics part files have the .prt extension. button works with the Look in: option menu to The Up One Level traverse back up through the directory hierarchy.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-7
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The Create New Folder the current directory.
button allows new subĆfolders to be created in
The View Menu pulldown button allows the appearance of the listing in the window to be modified. The default listing is that of a List. Selecting the Details button will display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name, Size, Type, last Modified date and time, and any Attributes that may apply to the file. Other options include; Large Icons, Small Icons and Thumbnails.
Properties can be accessed by selected mouse button three while in the Details" view mode
The ?
button at the top right of the dialog box changes the cursor to
and allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog box for a short description of its function.
1-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file This activity demonstrates how to create a new part file. Step 1 Create a new part file.
Choose the New icon.
The New Part File dialog box appears as shown.
Shaded radio" button indicates selected option
Current directory path and file extension
Step 2 Specify the units of measure for the new part file.
Choose the Millimeters radio button.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-9
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 3 Enter a new part file name. File names are governed by the naming conventions established for the operating system of the computer. In addition, standards set up by the company or project will affect naming conventions. Contact the system administrator for specific information on the number and types of characters for a valid file name.
With mouse button 1, click in the File name field.
Key in ***_new_1, where *** represent your initials. This will be a standard practice for this class to insure that the user at each workstation will be able to save his or her own part files.
Ensure the directory is set to your home" directory. This will also be a standard practice for this class. Any part that you create should be saved in a directory that you have permissions to.
Choose OK. The system processes the information and the part file is created and is loaded" into the current Unigraphics session. On Windows workstations the dialog box shown below will be displayed while the processing takes place.
The creator of a file has read and write access, which means they may modify the file and save the changes. Step 4 Save the part.
1-10
Choose the Save icon.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Toolbars The Unigraphics user interface supports the use of Toolbars to allow quick access to most of the available functionality via logical groupings of common functionality displayed as Icons. Each application has a set of toolbars which support functions within that application. In turn, each application can also have toolbars and icons displayed which allow access to functions which are most commonly accessed for the specific application (e.g. Modeling vs. Drafting) NOTE: When the Unigraphics session is exited, the state of the Toolbars is saved, this will be the state displayed when the same user restarts Unigraphics. This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option under the General tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog box. Toolbars may be in one of two states. The first is undocked where they are free floating on the screen. The graphic below shows three toolbars in an undocked state, located randomly by the user on the screen. These toolbars are shown within the Unigraphics window, but may be located outside the window depending on screen setup.
Undocked Toolbars
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-11
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The second state that Toolbars may be in is docked, where they anchor to the main Unigraphics window, either horizontally or vertically. The graphic below shows several toolbars. The Standard, View and Layer toolbars are docked horizontally just below the Menu Bar, while some Modeling application toolbars are docked vertically on the right and left side of the Unigraphics window. Docked toolbars are always within the Unigraphics window. Docked Toolbar (Vertical)
Docked Toolbars (Horizontal)
Control of Toolbar display may be accessed from one of 3 places:
1-12
Choose Tools"Customize from the main menu.
Choose View"Toolbars from the main menu.
Use the Third Mouse Button within the Unigraphics window, outside the Graphics window.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
The display of each toolbar, as well as each element of each toolbar, is user customizable. To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar choose Tools"Customize or click MB3 in the toolbar area and select Customize. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar name will instantly display the toolbar in the graphics area.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-13
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar element choose the Commands tab. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar command will instantly display the command in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check turns off the display.
1-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 More than one part file may be loaded at any time. This means that several ÉÉÉ parts may be worked on interchangeably. There are two designations for loaded ÉÉÉ part files: Opening Multiple Parts
Displayed - The part file is displayed in the graphics area.
Work - The part file is accessible for creation and editing operations.
In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. There are times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work part be other than the displayed part.
To Change The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open in the same session. These parts may have been loaded explicitly or implicitly, as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly. The Window option works in two ways: In the first method, an option for More Parts is selected. This displays the Change Displayed Part dialog box and lists all parts being referenced in the current session, excluding the current displayed part. This listing will include all components in an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in a loaded assembly. In the second method, a list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated as the displayed part is changed. This list contains the latest displayed part at the top (excluding the currently displayed part) and then each previous part in the order that they were displayed until a total of ten are listed. To change the displayed part to any of the parts in the list simply select its name from the list.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-15
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File ÉÉÉ This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient 1 ÉÉÉ environment in the Gateway application for this course as well as how ÉÉÉ working to load an existing part file into the work session. Continue with the previous part file ***_new_1. Step 1 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.
Click Mouse Button 3 (MB3) in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Click MB3 within toolbar area.
1-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
The Customize Dialog box appears and shows the current toolbars which are displayed.
Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON.
The Standard toolbar should be displayed on the screen docked in the upper left corner under the Menu bar.
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
Step 2 Open the part file pau_intro_1.
Choose the Open icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-17
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The Open Part File dialog box appears.
Check the current directory displayed in the Look in field. If necessary, choose the proper directory from the option menu.
Directory List Box
1-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
File List Box
EDS All Rights Reserved
Part Preview window
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Notice that there are no radio buttons for Inches and Millimeters in the Open Part File dialog box. The units of the file were determined prior to creation and may not be changed within an active Unigraphics session. A part file's units can be converted using a program called ug_convert outside of the active Unigraphics session.
Select pau_intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK, which opens the file (or doubleĆclick on the file name).
Notice the Status Line. It displays useful information as to what the system is doing while the part file is retrieved, as well as other information pertaining to the operation being performed.
Choose OK in the Warning dialog box to dismiss the Read Only message.
Once the part is open the following actions occur:
Options for viewing the contents of the file are available on the menu bar.
The graphics area is now active, showing the model in the condition in which it was last saved.
The title bar of the Unigraphics window displays the current work part in brackets [pau_intro_1.prt] and that its status is Read Only, meaning that changes may not be saved in this file.
It is important to keep in mind that a loaded part file is only a copy of what is stored on disk. Any new work that you do is not permanent until the part file is saved on disk.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-19
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 3 Display the View, Selection and Utility toolbars.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View, Selection and Utility toolbars are checked ON.
The toolbars are displayed on the screen in an Docked state. Remember that toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on the left or right. Locate the toolbars.
View
Selection
Utility
NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar
Step 4 Undock and Dock the Utility toolbar. NOTE: This portion of the activity is simply meant to show how to undock and dock toolbars. Whether toolbars are in docked or undocked conditions the process for moving them is very similar.
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down mouse button 1 (MB1).
Select on the Handle
1-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window, note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size.
Release MB1.
Notice the toolbar in an undocked condition displays a header with the name of the toolbar.
Place the cursor on the header portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1. Select Here
Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the main menu bar as shown below, note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size as the cursor leaves the graphics window.
Locate Here
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar is docked to the Unigraphics window.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-21
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 5 Move a docked toolbar.
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1.
Select Here
Drag the toolbar such that it is aligned under the Standard toolbar completely to the left side of the window.
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar remains docked to the Unigraphics window in the proper position.
Select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.
Locate Here
1-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Select the Selection toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Utility toolbar. Locate Here
Step 6 Leave the part open, it will be used again in a later activity.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-23
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Mouse Navigation The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. Examples of two different mouse devices are shown. The mouse buttons are referred to as the first, second, or third mouse buttons, starting from left to right. (This order can be reversed, for users who prefer that orientation, in most terminal control panels.) 3-BUTTON MOUSE
1
2
3
2-BUTTON MOUSE
1
3
Both buttons together execute the second mouse button action
The mouse may be used to perform various actions as shown in this chart.
Mouse Button First Mouse Button (left only) MB1
Action Selects or drags objects
Second Mouse Button (center OK while in an operation. Press and hold or both buttons) MB2 down while in the graphics area to Rotate the view. Hold down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down Ctrl+MB2 to Zoom In/Out.
1-24
Third Mouse Button in graphics area MB3
Displays popĆup menu for Back, Apply, Cancel, Pan, etc. Also displays action information for objects selected with MB1.
Mouse arrow over icons or option menu in a dialog box
Displays either the icon or option label.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Mouse PopĆup Menu As mentioned in the previous chart, the mouse may be used to perform various kinds of actions depending upon placement and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics area and the third mouse button is depressed, the Quick View PopĆUp menu shown in the graphic below is displayed. The popĆup menu provides a shortcut to many of the functions that are frequently used in Unigraphics.
NOTE: The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.
Refresh
Fit
Zoom
Zoom Rotate In/Out
Pan
Wireframe Settings
EDS All Rights Reserved
Shaded Settings
Wireframe
View Orientation
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-25
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The following table gives a brief summary of some of the options in the popĆup menu.
1-26
Option
Description
Apply
Performs operation displayed in the current dialog box.
Back
Goes back to a previous dialog box.
Cancel
Terminates the current operation.
Refresh
Refreshes the entire graphics window. Erases temporary display entities.
Fit
Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog box. Generally used in a modeling view.
Zoom
Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle.
Zoom In/Out
Changes the view scale via specification of a reference point and dragging the size using the mouse.
Rotate
Rotates the model using the XĆY method.
Pan
Pans the view in the direction you pull the mouse.
Update Display
Performs a Refresh operation as well as redisplaying silhouette curves of faces and hidden edges of solids.
Restore
Restores the original view that was in effect before one of the following operations was performed: zoom, pan, rotate.
Display Mode
Specifies the shading method in which the solid model is displayed.
Hidden Edges
Specifies the method of display of hidden edges in the graphics window.
Expand
Expands a drawing's member view to the full graphics area. This is a toggle. The affected view becomes the work view and remains the work view until the expand is turned off.
Orient View
Redisplays the current view in a canned view orientation. The original visualization settings and view modifications are retained. Active only in a modeling view.
Replace View
Replaces the current view with one of the canned views. Active only in a modeling view.
Undo
Reverses the effect of the last single operation performed. Any operation or edit performed prior to the last one will not be affected by undo.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of an object for modification or the extraction of data is required. There are three major categories of objects that a user may focus on: General Objects, Features, and Components.
Components General Objects
Features
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-27
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.
General Objects
Features
Components
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.
Color
Layer
Reset
Deselect All Class Selection Select All
Name Selection
Once an object has been selected, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.
1-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the shown pop-up dialogs to appear. Components Operations
General Objects Operations
Features Operations
NOTE:
Options may vary based upon application and object selected.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-29
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Preselection Preselection allows highlighting of objects that are selectable for various operations as the selection ball is moved over them. Preselection by default is ON in Unigraphics. Preselection may be controlled by choosing Preferences"Selection from the menu bar. The color of the highlighting is specified in the Color option menu. Preselection also applies to highlighting objects that are being deselected, usually through use of first mouse button. The state of the Preselection setting is not saved with the part, and lasts only through the current session.
Multiple Selection Candidates During the graphics area selection process it is common to have more than one selectable object contained in the selection ball. QuickPick is a selection confirmation interface that allows immediate selection of a single object or an easy method for browsing through multiple selection candidates. During selection the act of moving the selection ball over a selectable object causes the object to preĆhighlight in the preselection color. Selecting during this preĆhighlighting phase causes the highlighted object to be chosen for the action to be performed. Should there be more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and the cursor lingers for a short period of time, the appearance of the cursor changes to a cross followed by an ellipsis (+...) indicating that there is more than one selectable object at this position. Selection after the cursor changes display will result in the presentation of the QuickPick dialog box shown below.
NOTE: The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the ellipsis (+...) to appear can be adjusted by choosing Preferences"Selection and adjusting the Confirmation slider.
1-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Each selectable object beneath the cursor is represented by a number. Moving the cursor over the number highlights the object in the graphics area and displays the type of object in the Status area. The desired object may be selected by selecting its numbered button. The maximum number of buttons displayed at once is six. As shown in the previous graphic, when there are more than six objects in the selection list, the end button is shown truncated. Placing the cursor in the area outside the truncation causes the buttons to scroll in the direction indicated. NOTE: When the Quick Pick dialog box is presented upon selection of an object, Mouse Button 1 can also be used anywhere on the graphics screen to progress through the multiple candidates. This will also progress the highlighted number in the Quick Pick dialog box and give feedback in the Status line displaying the type of object being highlighted.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-31
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Layer Control Unigraphics offers users the control of visibility and selectability of objects by the use of layers. A layer is a systemĆdefined attribute that all objects in Unigraphics must have. Some other required attributes are color, font, and width. A layer may be thought of as a partition in the part file that objects reside in, or on for the purpose of organization. There are 256 usable layers in Unigraphics, one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of the 256 layers can be assigned to one of four classifications of status:
Work
Selectable
Visible Only
Invisible
The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work Layer when starting a new part file. When the Work Layer is changed to another, the previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be assigned a status of Visible Only or Invisible. The number of objects on one layer is not limited. Each user has the freedom to choose which layers they will create objects on and what the status will be. However, it should be mentioned that the use of company standards in regards to layers would be beneficial. To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose Format→Layer Settings or select the Layer Settings icon, which may be turned ON in the Utility toolbar as shown below.
Work Layer can also be changed here
1-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Layer Settings
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The following dialog box appears:
Work Layer Text Box
Select a layer from the Layer/Status listing and choose one of the four buttons below the listing.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-33
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Layers and Categories The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry Object Type Solid Geometry InterĆpart Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies
Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100
Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS
Layer Assignment 101-110
Category Name FORMATS
Drafting Objects Object Type Drawing Borders
Engineering Disciplines Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools
1-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150
Category Name MECH CAE
151-180 181-190
MFG QA
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Moving Layers In the process of creating a model, there are times when it is necessary to move an object to a different layer. This option is available using Format→Move to Layer. The objects which need to be moved are then selected using the Class Selection menu. Once all of the objects to be moved are selected, the Layer Move dialog box appears.
To complete the process, the destination layer may be entered in the Destination Layer or Category field, or the layer may be selected from the list. Choose OK or Apply to move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, more objects may be selected to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-35
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Class Selection The Class Selection dialog box is used to filter for certain types of objects during graphics area selection. Normally direct selection using the selection ball in the graphics area is enough to get the desired object. There are times when filtering using the Class Selection options is necessary or very helpful to ensure that only desired object/types are selected. This often occurs in complex parts.
Name filter
Filter methods
Area filters
1-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Class Selection Filter Types
The Name filter allows selection by object(s) by entering an assigned name attribute.
Filter Methods allows control of the selection of objects according to attributes such as features, type, color, and layer.
Features allows features (e.g. block, hole, datum, sketch) to be selected for various operations (e.g. delete or information). Once this option has been selected and features have been identified, choosing OK will perform the operation which introduced the Class Selection dialog. This option is not available for all operations (e.g. edit object display and Move to Layer).
Type allows the object types (e.g. curve, edge, body, datums) to be included or excluded from the selection process.
Color allows objects to be included or excluded from the selection process based on their color. All colors are initially selectable as the default.
Layer is used to specify the layer(s) on which to allow selection. Valid layer selection may include a single layer, an existing category, or a layer range.
Other is used to filter for font (line type), width, and userĆdefined attributes.
Reset is used to return all fields to the default state.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-37
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
1-38
Rectangle/Polygon Method is an option menu used to specify how objects are selected relative to an area defined by a rectangle or a polygon as discussed below. The rectangle or polygon is oriented in the current view plane and may be used in any view. A rectangle may be used by selecting a cursor location and dragging the cursor to another cursor location. The Polygon button must be selected prior to specifying the boundary with rubberĆbanding line segments in the graphics area.
Inside - Objects completely inside the rectangle/polygon are selected.
Outside -Objects completely outside the rectangle/polygon are selected.
Crossing - Objects crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon are selected.
Inside/Crossing - All objects inside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon. This is the default method.
Outside/Crossing - All objects outside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon.
Up One Level allows selection of the next level component or group if components or groups are enabled for that operation. This is useful in assemblies work.
Select All selects all objects in the work view by current filter methods settings.
All but Selected selects all objects in the work view except for those currently highlighted by selection.
Chain allows the selection of a sequence of contiguous curves or solid edges.
Polygon allows the selection of objects using a polygon that is specified in the graphics area. (See Rectangle/Polygon Method above.)
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) This activity shows how to make a copy of an existing part file by saving it using a different name. Continue with the previous part file pau_intro_1. Step 1 Create a copy of a part file.
Choose File→Save As...
The Save Part File As dialog box appears. Directory where part is to be saved
Up One Level
Enter new filename here
Step 2 Save a copy of the file in the desired directory.
In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu to navigate to the proper directory to save the part file. (HINT: should be one level up from the parts folder)
Step 3 Enter a new part file name.
Click in the File name field.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-39
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part file name where *** represent your initials.
Choose OK.
Type filename here
The Status Line states that the part file is being saved. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" displays. Work in Unigraphics may be resumed. Step 4 Save the work.
Choose the Save icon.
Once again, Unigraphics informs you in the Status Line that it is saving the part file. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" is displayed.
TIP
1-40
You can save your work and exit Unigraphics all at once by choosing File"Close"Save All and Exit.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics This activity shows how to close a part file and exit Unigraphics. Continue with the previous part file ***_intro_1. Use File→Close→Selected Parts to close one or more of the loaded parts. Close All may be used to close all parts loaded in the current session from the Close Part dialog box. Step 1 Close the part file.
Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
The Close Part dialog box appears showing a list of all open part files, which currently are ***_intro_1 and ***_new_1 part files.
List of open part files
***_intro_1 ***_new_1
Select the ***_intro_1 part file and choose MB2.
Since the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is immediately closed.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-41
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
If the part had been changed, the system displays a warning message letting you know that the part has been modified since it was last saved.
***_intro_1
Closing the part file does not save the part, it only clears the part file from the local memory in the workstation. Changes that have been made to the part file will be lost if the close operation is continued. Step 2 Learn how to end the Unigraphics work session.
Choose File→Exit. A dialog box displays.
If part file(s) are still open and have been modified, a message displays:
To end Unigraphics, from either Exit message window, you would choose OK.
1-42
Choose Cancel to dismiss the message and keep the session open. Do not Exit Unigraphics at this time.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling This activity will establish an efficient toolbar working environment in the Modeling application for this course. Other toolbars can be added as needed. Step 1 Change the displayed part to ***_new_1 (HINT: Window from the menu bar) Step 2 Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway Application.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and check ON the Application toolbar.
Click MB3 within toolbar area.
Locate the Application toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or undocked.
NOTE: Icons may vary.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-43
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 3 Customize the Application toolbar.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and highlight Application in the Toolbars column.
Select these options
A listing with the commands for the Application toolbar is displayed. The commands displayed on the toolbar are checked in the Commands column.
1-44
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
Scroll down to see all of the options in the Commands column. Turn ON the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies commands and turn OFF all others options. Also, turn ON the Separator above the Assemblies command.
Scroll down here
Note that the display of the toolbar changes immediately upon selection of commands.
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
Locate the Application toolbar as shown below. Locate here
These toolbar settings will be retained for the Gateway application for the rest of the course.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-45
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 4 Enter the Modeling Application.
Select the Modeling icon
in the Application toolbar.
Entering a different application will introduce a new set of toolbars. The toolbars that were established in the Gateway application may move and have different commands in them. Step 5 Display the common toolbars from the Gateway application.
1-46
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify that the Standard, View, Selection, Utility and Application toolbars are checked ON. Turn OFF all other toolbars. Other toolbars will be turned ON throughout the course as they are needed.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Dock the toolbars in similar locations as defined in the Gateway application.
Step 6 Customize the toolbars.
Toolbars
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the table below.
Standard New
View Refresh
Open
Fit
Save
Zoom
Separator
Selection Utility Application Select Work Drafting General Layer Objects Select Layer Assemblies Features Settings Select Separator Gateway Components Separator WCS Dynamics Type Filter Orient WCS Reset Separator Select All
Zoom In/Out Delete Rotate Commands Undo Pan Separator Separator Information Wireframe Settings Shaded Deselect All Settings Wireframe Separator View Up One Orientation Level
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
Step 7 Close the part file, do not save.
Choose File"Close"All Parts.
Choose OK in the Question window.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
1-47
Getting Started
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ SUMMARY In this lesson you:
1-48
Started Unigraphics and were made aware that the user interface appearance may be slightly different on UNIX and NT platforms.
Executed Menu Bar Pull Down Menus and saw how these tools can save time.
Created, retrieved, and saved parts. By performing these functions you were made aware of that parts are only loaded into memory and are not saved until performing a save" or save as" operation.
Copied a Part File.
Closed a Part File.
Were introduced to the layer system in Unigraphics, and saw how this convention aids in part file organization.
Exited Unigraphics.
Activated toolbars and adjusted the commands within them.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Introduction to Solid Modeling Lesson 2
PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics Modeling application. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS).
Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS).
Manipulate the WCS.
Define Points for Locations.
Create and Edit a Primitive Block.
Create a direction vector.
Create a primitive cylinder.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-1
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics Before any portions of the solid model may be defined, it is important to understand the options Unigraphics offers for location and orientation of objects. Since solid modeling takes place in a 3Ćdimensional environment, model space is defined as the infinite extension of a 3Ćdimensional field represented in the views of your graphics area.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Start here and go this direction."
There are many coordinate systems in Unigraphics, all are rightĆhand, Cartesian coordinate systems, made up of a set of X, Y, and Z axes, 90° apart from each other. A threeĆaxis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system. The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. The origin has the coordinate values of X=0, Y=0, and Z=0. The figure below illustrates that, starting at the origin, each axis has a positive direction and a negative direction.
+Z -X
+Y
-Y
+X -Z
Origin
This manual will primarily discuss the following different coordinate system types used in Unigraphics modeling.
2-2
Absolute Coordinate System (ABS)
Work Coordinate System (WCS)
Feature Coordinate System (Discussed in Form Features Lesson)
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Absolute Coordinate System The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. It defines a fixed point and orientation in model space. The Absolute Coordinate System is necessary to relate location or orientation between any two objects, solid models, Unigraphics part files, or even a Unigraphics part file to any other CAE system. An object positioned at Absolute X= 1, Y=1, and Z=1 in one part file is the exact same absolute position in any other part file.
Work Coordinate System Since the ABS is not mobile, Unigraphics uses the Work Coordinate System (WCS) to establish a mobile coordinate system to facilitate geometry construction in different orientations. The WCS can be located and oriented manually anywhere in model space. The WCS is not a selectable entity. Most solid modeling operations in Unigraphics do not require manipulation of the WCS, since features are added to a model relative to existing geometry of the model, not relative to positions and directions in model space. In those cases, the WCS is handled automatically by Unigraphics. However, certain functions are dependent on the WCS, and require the WCS to be positioned prior to performing the operation. Curve and Primitive creation are two functions dependent on the WCS.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-3
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Manipulating the WCS The WCS options are accessed by choosing WCS on the menu bar or from the Utility toolbar (a part file must be displayed). In general, there are four ways to manipulate the WCS. They are origin, rotation, orientation and dynamics. WCS Dynamics will be the focus in this lesson. WCS Dynamics: Provides a dynamic interface to control the location and orientation of the WCS by entering values or dragging handles of the WCS in the graphics screen.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
After choosing WCS Dynamics, the WCS displays with handles. The Point Constructor icon also appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window.
Handles Point Constructor
NOTE: WCS Dynamics may also be accessed by double-clicking directly on the WCS on the graphics screen. When the cursor is placed directly over the WCS there will be a temporary display of rotation planes shown to indicate that the WCS can be directly selected. If there is another object coincident with the WCS the temporary display of rotation planes may not appear. In cases where the WCS cannot be double-clicked, WCS Dynamics can be accessed from the Menu bar or the Utility toolbar (as shown below).
WCS Dynamics
2-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Dynamic WCS Handles Vertex Handle: If the square handle is selected the WCS can be relocated to any point on the graphics screen (e.g. control point, cursor position, arc center, etc.) and help indicators will display next to an object to help you predict where the WCS will relocate to. option is also available on the graphics window to The Point Constructor position the WCS, when selected this option will bring the Point Constructor dialog box up. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged in any direction.
Vertex Handle
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-5
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS, Primitives or any other geometry, the definition of specific points in space is necessary, and is a common function in any CAE system. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location. Using the Point Constructor dialog box, you can define origin points, start points, endpoints, etc. based on existing geometry or coordinate values.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
End Point Control Point
Existing Point Cursor Location
Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Point on Surface
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Point on Curve/Edge
Quadrant Point None Rectangular Cylindrical Spherical
Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none
NOTE:
Vector Along Curve
For more information on Point types, see Appendix B.
Axis Handle: If one of the three axis handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field appears on the graphics window next to the WCS, which allows input of specific distances or snap increments. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged along its axis.
2-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Rotation Handle: If one of the three rotation handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field also appears next to the WCS, which allows input of specific angles or snap increments. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be rotated about the axis.
Rotation Handle
Axis Handle
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Dynamic Input Field
Distance/Angle: When the Dynamic Input Field appears next to the WCS the Distance/Angle fields display the offset distance or rotation that results from a dragging operation. You can also use these fields to directly enter a distance or rotation angle. Snap (Angle/Distance): Using a Rotation handle, you can snap the WCS 45 degrees when you rotate within the Snap (angle) tolerance. The default value for a tolerance is 45°, but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. For example, if the Snap (angle) tolerance is set to 5° and you rotate the WCS anywhere between 40 and 50° from its original position, it will snap to 45°. The Angle field will update to the angle moved as the handle is dragged. Using an Axis handle, you can snap the WCS incremental distances when you drag the handle. The default value for a Snap (distance) is 0 (zero), but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. The Distance field will update to the distance moved as the handle is dragged. Finished Moving: Use the middle mouse button (MB2) to confirm the location or orientation of the WCS and exit WCS Dynamics.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-7
Introduction to Solid Modeling
NOTE: Undo is available and can be used during WCS movement to restore the WCS to a previous location or orientation.
Utility Toolbar The WCS options may also be accessed through the Utility toolbar.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ WCS Dynamics
2-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Orient WCS
Display WCS
EDS All Rights Reserved
Save WCS
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Orient WCS: Allows the location and the rotation of the WCS to be altered in one step. The menu shown below contains the various options to accomplish WCS orientation.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Before Using the XĆaxis, YĆaxis option to change origin and rotation in the same step.
XĆaxis
After
YĆaxis
NOTE: The Orient option is commonly used to move the WCS back to the Absolute origin and orientation.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-9
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS In this activity, the WCS will be moved to different positions on a model. By default, the WCS location and orientation in a new part file coincides with the Absolute Coordinate System. During model construction, Unigraphics usually manages the WCS automatically. However, some construction and Info functions depend on the WCS, so it is helpful to learn how to manipulate the WCS.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 1 Open part file pau_wcs_1 and start the Modeling Application.
Step 2 Change the Work Coordinate System origin.
2-10
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon toolbar.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
from the Utility
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Select the various points shown. Do not select any of the WCS handles. Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. or Ellipse Ctr.) Select here (End Pt.)
Select this circular edge (Quadrant Pt. or Arc Ctr.)
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. or Ellipse Ctr.)
Select here (End Pt.)
Select here (End Pt.)
The vertex is selected by default when entering WCS Dynamics, therefore you can simply pick points in the graphics window to move the WCS. The relocated WCS has the same XC, YC, ZC directions as the prior WCS location.
Choose MB2 when finished moving the WCS to exit WCS Dynamics.
Step 3 Change the direction of the Work Coordinate System axes.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-11
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Move the WCS to the arc center shown below.
Select this circular edge when the center is high lighted.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the Rotation Handle shown below.
Select this handle
The Dynamic Input Field appears allowing an angle or snap (angle) to be entered.
2-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Before
Enter -905 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter. After The origin of the WCS is unchanged, the coordinate system is rotated about the XC axis, from the ZC axis toward the YC axis 90
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The direction of rotation is based on the Right Hand Rule.
Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.
Step 4 Change the orientation of the WCS. The image below has be rotated for clarity. Feel free to shade and rotate the view for better viewing of the part.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.
Move the WCS to the location shown below.
Select this corner
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-13
Introduction to Solid Modeling
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the XC Axis Handle as shown below.
Select this Handle
Orient the XC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.
Arrow should point in this direction
Select here
2-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Select the YC Axis Handle.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this Handle
Orient the YC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.
Arrow should point in this direction Select here
Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-15
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Step 5 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.
Choose the Orient WCS icon as shown below. Orient WCS
The following menu appears, listing the various ways to specify a new location and orientation for the WCS.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.
Choose OK.
Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts and choose OK in the Question dialog.
2-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Primitives A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be thought of as raw stock", to which material will be added or removed to achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of the solid modeling process. Using one of the Primitive types as the base feature eliminates the need to create and sweep curve geometry. When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as its location and orientation in model space. The four types of Primitives are:
Block
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
NOTE: Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature. NOTE: Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a specified point in model space. However, they can be moved manually by either Transforming or, preferably, using Move Feature. A primitive's creation parameter values may be edited and made associative to each other. This lesson will concentrate on the Block feature. Another type of Primitive will be discussed later.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-17
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Block A Primitive block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS. There are three different methods that may be used to create a block. The middle portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type of block creation method you choose. This manual will discuss the first method, Origin, Edge Lengths.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Two Points, Height Origin, Edge Lengths
2-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Two Diagonal Points
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Origin, Edge Lengths Method
Choose the Block icon.
(Insert→Form Feature→Block)
Choose the creation method of Origin, Edge Lengths
Define the length for each edge.
Define the Point Method for the corner's origin.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
NOTE: When no solid exists, no selection will place the corner at Absolute 0,0,0. The corner used for the origin is the vertex of the edges used to define the size of the block.
Choose the desired boolean operation (Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature.).
NOTE: All of the X, Y, and Z values of the edge lengths are measured relative to the WCS, and must be positive values since they are used as the length, width, and height parameters of the block.
Choose OK or Apply.
Once the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the values that were used for edge lengths during creation.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-19
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application This activity will establish additional toolbars in the Modeling application for this lesson and future lessons. Step 1 Create a new inch part file and name it ***_prim_exp_1 and choose the Modeling icon.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Display additional toolbars in the Modeling application.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and turn ON the Form Feature, Feature Operation, Edit Feature and Modeling Toggles toolbars.
Form Feature
Feature Operation
Edit Feature
Modeling Toggles
NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar
2-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Dock the toolbars horizontally or vertically in the locations defined below. Edit Feature
Feature Operation
Modeling Toggles
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Form Feature
Step 3 Customize the toolbars.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the following table.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-21
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Toolbars
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Feature
Feature Operation
Edit Feature
Sketch
Taper
Edit Feature Parameters
Extruded Body
Edge Blend
Edit Positioning
Revolved Body
Edge Chamfer
Move Feature
Sweep along Guide
Hollow
Separator
Separator
Instance Feature
Suppress Feature Unsuppress Feature Separator Delay Update on Edit Update Separator Feature Playback
Hole Commands
Offset Face
Boss
Separator
Pocket
Unite
Pad Slot
Subtract Intersect
Groove
Modeling Toggles Form Feature Toolbar Feature Operation Toolbar Edit Feature Toolbar
Separator Datum Plane Datum Axis Datum CSYS Separator Block Cylinder
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
Step 4 Continue to the next activity.
2-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block In this activity, a Primitive Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block. Continue with the previous part file ***_prim_exp_1. Step 1 Orient the WCS.
Choose the Trimetric icon
from the View toolbar.
Place the cursor over the WCS and double-click on it to enter WCS Dynamics.
Select the YC-ZC Rotation Handle and drag the WCS to to orientation shown below.
Select this handle
Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.
Step 2 Create a Block.
Choose the Block icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-23
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Solid Modeling
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon.
Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) =
8 (Tab)
Length (YC) =
6 (Tab)
Length (ZC) =
6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)
Choose MB2.
Choose the Fit icon
from the View toolbar.
Step 3 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS orientation.
Choose Orient WCS icon
Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.
Choose MB2.
.
Notice the WCS rotated back to the absolute orientation but the block stays in the same orientation. The WCS is only referenced when creating primitives and is not created associative to it. Step 4 Change the size of the block.
2-24
Ensure the Select Features icon Selection toolbar.
Place the cursor over the block an double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
is ON in the
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Select the parameter shown below to edit.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this parameter
Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.
Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-25
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Defining Vectors Some of the primitives require a direction vector to define in what direction the primitive will be created. The direction, reference, and destination vectors may be defined using the Vector Constructor dialog box shown below. At Angle Between Two Points
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge/Curve Vector On Curve Vector
Inferred Vector
Face Normal
Datum Plane Normal
ZC Axis
Datum Axis YC Axis
XC Axis
NOTE: The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of this course.
2-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Cylinder A Primitive cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation, size and location of the cylinder. The methods to create cylinders are shown in the next figure.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Diameter, Height Method This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and height values. The location and axis direction vector must also be specified. After choosing this method:
Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor.
Enter the diameter and height.
Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor.
In the example below, the direction vector is the ZC Axis. The origin is shown with the cylinder being created at the specified height in the direction of the vector. Direction vector Origin ZC
YC XC
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-27
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder In this activity, a primitive cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector menu. Step 1 Open the part pau_seedpart_mm.
Step 2 Choose Modeling.
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Create the Cylinder.
Choose the Cylinder icon.
Choose the Diameter, Height method.
Choose the YC Axis direction icon from the Vector Constructor.
Choose OK.
Enter the following Values: Diameter = 75 Height = 200
Choose OK.
Locate the cylinder at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0. Choose Reset in the Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu.
ZC
YC XC
2-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Step 4 Edit the size of the cylinder.
Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters.
Choose Feature Dialog.
Change the values as follows: Diameter = Height =
15 150
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose MB2 twice.
Choose File"Close"All Parts, do not save the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2-29
Introduction to Solid Modeling
SUMMARY
ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
In this lesson you:
2-30
Were taught that the Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate system that defines a fixed point in model space.
Were taught that the Work Coordinate System is a mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary to support other Unigraphics functions.
Relocated, rotated, and reoriented the WCS.
Created a Block. You were also taught that if using a Primitive feature, it should be the base feature and that Primitives should be limited to one in a part file because they cannot be associatively positioned.
Changed the size of a Primitive after creation.
Created a Primitive Cylinder.
Edited a Primitive Cylinder
Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Form Features Lesson 3
PURPOSE
To introduce Form Features.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create Boss, Pocket, Hole, and Slot Form Features.
Position Boss, Pocket, Hole, and Slot Form Features .
Create a Rectangular Pad.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
3-1
Form Features
Form Features Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. These features include holes, slots, bosses, pads, pockets and grooves. Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them.
The Placement Face
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
All form features require a placement face. For a groove, the placement face must be cylindrical or conical. For all other form features, the placement face must be planar. This planar placement face defines the XĆY plane of the coordinate system for the feature being created. Features are created normal to the placement face. A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. The creation and use of datum planes is covered in a later lesson.
Datum Plane used as Planar Placement Face for Hole feature through cylindrical face of boss.
3-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The Horizontal and Vertical Reference The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate system. Any linear edge, planar face, datum axis, or datum plane that may be projected onto the planar placement face may be selected to define the horizontal direction. The Horizontal Reference is required to define the length direction of form features having a Length parameter (slot, rectangular pocket and pad). If no edge in a true horizontal direction is available the user can specify a vertical reference from which the system will infer horizontal as perpendicular to the selected vertical direction.
X+ Vector
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The Horizontal Reference is also required to define horizontal or vertical types of positioning dimensions for features that do not initially require a Horizontal Reference (holes bosses, and cylindrical pockets).
Feature Coordinate System During creation of features of a Unigraphics model, the system will manipulate the WCS automatically to facilitate creation of the feature specified based on the user input provided. The manipulated coordinate system is called a Feature Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored as part of the feature definition. Unigraphics will manipulate the WCS back to the FCS orientation during subsequent feature editing.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-3
Form Features
Positioning Form Features Positioning Dimensions are distance values measured along the planar placement face. They may be used to place the form feature at the proper location on the placement face. These dimensions should be considered as constraints, or rules, that the geometry must obey. There are nine different positioning methods available on the Positioning dialog box, as shown below. Vertical
Parallel Perpendicular
Parallel at a Distance
Horizontal Angular
Line onto Line
Point onto Point
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Point onto Line
NOTE: When positioning a form feature, only applicable dimension types will be displayed. It is not necessary to add positioning dimensions to form features, but it is recommended that positioning dimensions be added at the time of creation for ease of later editing.
3-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Positioning Terminology
Fully Specified -The feature is uniquely located by the positioning dimensions specified.
Underspecified - The feature is not yet uniquely located.
Overspecified - The feature has had more positioning dimensions applied to it than are necessary.
Target Solid - The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole, Slot, Pocket or Groove will subtract from, or a Boss or Pad will unite with.
Tool Solid -The solid representation of the feature being defined by the current operation. In the context of a Form Feature it is the representation of the Hole, Slot, Pocket, Pad, Boss, or Groove that will be subtracted from or united with the Target Solid.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-5
Form Features
Positioning Methods
Horizontal - Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Horizontal is measured along the XĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. the Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
Feature Coordinate System
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Target edge
Tool edge
Horizontal reference (datum plane) 1.50
Horizontal positioning dimension
3-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Vertical - Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Vertical is measured along the YĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable). Feature Coordinate System Vertical positioning dimension Target edge (arc center)
1.50
Tool edge (arc center) Horizontal reference
Angular - Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each other. The angle is measured in a counterĆclockwise direction (with respect to the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest to where they are selected.
Feature Coordinate System
Tool edge (center line) 30 Angular positioning dimension
Target edge
Horizontal reference
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-7
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions
Fully Specified by Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions
15 .500
Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension
Tool edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension
.500
Horizontal reference
Fully Specified by Horizontal and Vertical Positioning Dimensions
1.00
Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension (arc center)
Tool edge (arc center)
1.00
Horizontal reference
NOTE: When positioning Holes, Bosses, and Cylindrical Pockets the Tool Edge is automatically selected and defined as the arc center.
3-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Parallel - Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable). Feature Coordinate System
Tool edge (arc center) 1.375 Parallel positioning dimension
Target edge (arc center)
Perpendicular - Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. The linear target edge is always the first pick. Target edges 1.50 Feature Coordinate System
Perpendicular positioning dimension
Tool edge (arc center) 2.00
In the above example the feature (hole) can be fully specified with two Perpendicular dimensions. Features with length, such as slot, pocket and pad, will require an additional positioning dimension to control rotation.
TIP
Using Perpendicular positioning instead of Horizontal or Vertical can save time since no horizontal or vertical reference is needed.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-9
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
Parallel at a Distance - Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
Feature Coordinate System
Parallel positioning dimension
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2.00 Tool edge (center line)
Target edge
Horizontal reference
These two edges are constrained parallel
Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature with length, rotational and distance in one direction. Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
3-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Point onto Point - Specifies that the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the tool solid is zero. This is most commonly used to align arc centers of cylindrical or conical features and fully constrain their location since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features. Point on tool solid
Point on target solid
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-11
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
Point onto Line - Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
Point onto Line positioning dimensions
0
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Feature Coordinate System
0
Target edges (Datum Planes)
Tool edge (arc center)
Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
3-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Line onto Line - Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for features with
length (slot, pocket or pad).
Point onto Line positioning dimensions
Horizontal reference
Feature Coordinate System
0
Target edge (Datum Plane)
Tool edge (center line of slot)
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature of length, rotational and translation in one direction. Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line). Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature→Positioning dialog.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-13
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
Hole This option is used to create simple, counterbore, and countersink holes in an existing solid. The middle portion of the dialog window changes depending on the hole type that is selected. Simple
Placement face
Counterbore
Thru face
Countersink
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Hole Creation Method
3-14
Choose Insert→Form Feature→Hole (or the Hole icon.)
Choose the hole type.
Select the placement face. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse Side button as required.
Select the thru face if applicable.
Key in the required values (or statements).
Choose OK or Apply.
Create positional dimensions as required.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Simple
Hole Depth
Hole Diameter
Counterbored CĆBore Diameter
Hole Depth
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
CĆBore Depth Tip Angle
Countersunk CĆSink Angle
CĆSink Diameter
Hole Depth
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-15
Form Features
Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features This activity will show the creation of a thru hole feature. Simple Thru Hole Diameter = 1.50
Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.
Step 2 Create a Block.
Choose the Block icon.
If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon.
Key in the following parameters:
3-16
Length (XC) =
10 (Tab)
Length (YC) =
4 (Tab)
Length (ZC) =
2
Choose MB2.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose the Fit icon
from the View toolbar.
Step 3 Create a simple thru hole.
Choose the Hole icon.
Ensure the Simple hole icon
Select the top face of the block as shown below. Confirm the selection if necessary.
is selected.
Select top face here
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If incorrect geometry is selected, select the Placement Face icon and then reselect the correct geometry.
again
Select the bottom face as the Thru Face. Select thru face with one pick in this region or select and confirm
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-17
Form Features
Enter 1.5 for the diameter and choose OK.
The hole is temporarily represented as a long tool solid that extends beyond the thru face, as shown in the figure below.
Step 4 Position the hole feature.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The Positioning dialog box is displayed.
The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge.
and
Select this edge as the Target Edge
3-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Key in the name of the expression (dim_1) and the value (2) as shown below.
NOTE: The system applied expression names may be accepted, however, it is a good practice to give expressions a meaningful name, doing so will make interrogation of the part easier.
Choose the Perpendicular icon.
Select the left edge of the top face as shown in the figure below.
Select this edge as the Target Edge
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-19
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
Key in the name of the expression and the value as shown below.
Choose OK.
Since the location of the hole is completely specified, it is moved to the new position and the Boolean operation is performed. The part now looks like the following figure.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
3-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Slot This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling machine tool. In each case, the shape of the imaginary cutting tool corresponds to the slot type and dimensions. The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the imaginary cutter tool is normal to the face or datum plane selected. The path of the slot will be parallel to the horizontal reference selected. The system prompts for all necessary slot parameters, depending upon the specific type of slot feature chosen. The slot types are shown in the dialog box illustrated below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ For all slot types, the Thru slot option extends the slot length along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference through the faces, specified by the user.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-21
Form Features
Rectangular This option allows creation of a slot in an existing solid body using a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will leave sharp edges along the bottom of the slot. Rectangular slot parameters are Slot Width, Slot Depth, Slot Length, as shown below. ZC XC
YC
Width
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Length Depth
The width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical cutting tool. The depth of the slot is measured in a parallel orientation to the tool axis, from the origin point of the slot to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be positive. The length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature coordinate system). Length values must be positive. NOTE: The system will not prompt for slot length if the Thru option has been toggled on. Instead, it prompts for selection of the two thru faces.
3-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The figure below illustrates a T-slot using the Thru option. Placement Face
Second Thru face
Centerline First Thru face
The four other available slot profiles are illustrated below. Depth
Ball Diameter
BallĆEnd Slot
Top Width
Corner Radius
Top Depth
Bottom Depth
Depth
Width
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
UĆSlot
Width Angle
Bottom Width
TĆSlot
Dovetail Slot
NOTE: The value of the corner radius of the U-Slot must be less than 1/2 the width of the slot.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-23
Form Features
Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features In this activity, you will create two different types of slots in the top of a solid. Step 1 Open the part file pau_slot_1.
Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.
Step 2 Create a rectangular slot. Use the information provided in the figure below for your work. Rectangular slot width = 2.00 depth = 0.50 length = 3.00
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Slot icon.
Then choose the Rectangular option.
The Cue line prompts you to select the planar placement face.
Select the top of the block at the approximate position shown in the figure below. The top edges change to the system color. Select top face here
3-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
If the Cue line asks for a selection confirmation, and the top edges are highlighted, choose the correct number from the QuickPick dialog box.
If the wrong face is highlighted, select the Back button in the active dialog box. The Cue line asks for a horizontal reference. The object selected can be a linear edge, solid face, datum axis, datum plane. Or, a vertical reference could be specified instead using any of the fore mentioned objects. The horizontal direction selected will determine the direction in which the slot length will be placed in the part.
Select the bottom front edge of the block, as shown in the following figure, or any edge parallel to it.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this edge as the horizontal reference
A conehead displays the direction of the length of the slot.
Enter the parameters for the rectangular slot: Width=
2
Depth= .5 Length= 3
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-25
Form Features
The rectangular slot will appear and be placed at the location of the screen pick on the top of the block.
Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.
Select the target edge as shown below. Select this edge.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge.
Key in 2 and choose OK.
Choose the Perpendicular icon.
Select the target edge as shown below.
Select this edge.
3-26
Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge.
Key in 3.5 and choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
The Boolean operation is performed. The finished rectangular slot should now look like this.
Step 3 Create a TĆslot.
Select Back.
Toggle the Thru option ON.
Choose the T-Slot option.
Select the planar placement face as shown.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select top face here
Select the horizontal reference.
Select this edge
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-27
Form Features
Select the thru faces for the T-slot.
Starting thru face
Ending thru face
Enter the following values for the parameters: Top width =
.5
Top depth =
.5
Bottom width = .75 Bottom depth = .5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.
Select the target edge as shown below. Select this edge.
Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge.
Key in 2 and choose OK.
Since thru faces have been defined the slot does not need to be positioned along its length.
3-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose OK.
Your part should look like the following figure.
Step 4 Optional: Add a third slot, a dovetail Thru slot, that intersects both of the other slots. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-29
Form Features
Pocket The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body. There are three types of pockets:
Cylindrical
Rectangular
General
The Rectangular Pocket will be discussed in this lesson.
Rectangular Pocket This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth, with or without a floor and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered sides.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The following parameters may be specified: X Length
Positioning Centerlines
Origin point
Y Length
Corner Radius
Horizontal Reference
Taper Angle
Z Length Floor Radius
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge, or from the centerlines provided for this purpose.
3-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features In this activity, a rectangular pocket will be created on the block. The finished part will look like the figure below.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_pocket_1.
Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a rectangular pocket.
Choose the Pocket icon.
Choose Rectangular.
Select the placement face as shown in the figure below.
Select placement face here
Select this face as horizontal reference
Select the horizontal reference as shown in the same figure.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-31
Form Features
Enter the parameter values as follows: X Length =
3
Y Length =
1.5
Z Length =
1
Corner Radius =
.5
Floor Radius =
.25
Taper Angle =
0
Choose OK.
The rectangular pocket appears at the location where the planar placement face was selected.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fully position the pocket using your own methods, and parametric values.
Step 3 Use a similar method to create the second pocket shown at the beginning of the activity. Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
3-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Boss The Boss feature allows the addition of a cylindrical shape to a specified height, having either straight or tapered sides. The parameters of the boss are diameter, height and taper angle. Diameter
Height Z Y Tapered boss
X
Z Y
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
X
Diameter is the distance across the required boss. Height is measured from the placement face. Taper angle is the angle at which the cylinder wall of the boss inclines. A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall is to incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-33
Form Features
Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features In this activity, two bosses will be created and positioned on a cover plate for a modular telephone jack as shown below.
Before Boss diameter=0.20 Boss height=0.075
After
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open the part file.
Choose File→Open.
Select pau_coverplate_1.
NOTE: The dimensions shown are from the outside of the part, be sure to select the proper edges to dimension from.
Save the part as ***_coverplate_1 where *** represent your initials.
Step 2 Create a boss feature.
3-34
Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Choose the Boss icon.
Select and accept the planar placement face as shown below. Select top inside face approximately here
Enter the parameters for the boss: Diameter =
.2
Height =
.075
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Taper Angle = 0
Choose Apply.
The boss is temporarily placed on the face where you selected it. The Positioning dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Position the boss.
The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
and
3-35
Form Features
Select a right side edge on the outside of the part for a target edge for the perpendicular dimension, as shown below.
Front
Select either of the right outside edges as the target edge.
A temporary display appears that shows the distance from the center of the boss to the target edge.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Enter 1.5 for the new value.
Choose the Perpendicular icon again.
Select a front edge on the outside of the part for the target edge for the second perpendicular dimension, as shown below.
Target edge
Enter 1 for the new value and choose OK.
The boss is moved into the correct location and the Boolean operation is performed.
3-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Step 4 Create the second boss and position it.
Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for the second boss. Use the same positioning values, this time use the back, outside edge to locate the boss.
Step 5 Choose File"Save. Do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-37
Form Features
Pad This option allows a raised pad on a solid body to be created, with or without taper and corner radii. The parameter values of the pad feature are X, Y, and Z lengths, corner radius, and taper. The two types of pads are:
Rectangular
General (Not covered in this course)
Rectangular Pad The Length, Width, and Height values of the Pad feature relate directly to the displayed vector indicating the Horizontal direction. Length is measured along the displayed vector, Width is measured perpendicular to the displayed vector, and Height is measured normal to the Placement face.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The Corner Radius specifies the blend radius for the vertical edges of the pad feature (along the Height). This number may be positive or zero. A zero radius results in sharp corners on the pad feature. The Taper Angle is the angle at which the four walls of the pad feature incline inward, and must be positive or equal to zero. A zero value results in vertical walls. Tapered Pad
Length
Positioning Centerlines Width
Horizontal reference
Height Corner Radius
3-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad In this activity, two pads will be centered with respect to the two existing bosses. When complete, the part should appear as shown below. Step 1 Continue working with ***_coverplate_1. Rectangular pad length 2.9 width 0.1 height 0.0375
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create the first rectangular pad.
Choose the Pad icon.
Choose Rectangular from the dialog box.
Select the top surface at a location which approximates the position shown.
Location for pad
It is now necessary to define the horizontal reference. This determines the direction of the Length parameter of the pad as well as the direction for a horizontal Positioning Dimension.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-39
Form Features
Select one of the edges or faces shown below to establish the horizontal direction of the feature coordinate system. Select back edges or face for Horizontal Reference
Select front edge or face for Horizontal Reference
A vector arrow displays the horizontal direction of the pad.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
If the vector is not pointing in the desired direction, choose Back and respecify the horizontal reference.
Enter the parameters for the pad:
Length =
2.9
Width =
.1
Height =
.0375
Corner Radius =
0
Taper Angle =
0
Choose OK.
The pad is temporarily positioned at the location selected for the placement face. Step 3 Position the pad.
3-40
Choose the Line onto Line icon Method dialog box.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
on the Positioning
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
Select the target edge (an inside edge as shown below).
Tool edge
Target edge
Select a tool edge (the small edge at the top end of the pad)
The position is specified in one direction, another positioning dimension is required to fully specify the feature's location.
Choose the Vertical icon.
Select the target edge (circular edge of the boss) as shown in the figure below.
Target edge
Choose Arc Center.
Select the pad's horizontal center line as the Tool Edge.
Enter a new value of 0.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-41
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Features
The pad moves into position and the Boolean operation is performed. The part should look as shown below:
Step 4 Create the second pad and position it in the same way to the other boss. When completed the part should look like the figure shown below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Save and close the part file.
3-42
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Form Features
SUMMARY
In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. The different form features are: Hole Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
This lesson you:
Identified a Placement Face.
Identified a Horizontal Reference.
Identified Target and Tool Solids
Applied Positioning dimensions to a form feature.
Created a Hole Form Feature.
Created Slot Form Features.
Created Pocket Form Features.
Created Boss Form Features
Created a Rectangular Pad.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
3-43
Form Features
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
3-44
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Expressions Lesson 4
PURPOSE
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create Expressions.
Edit Expressions.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
4-1
Expressions
Expressions Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. Unigraphics automatically creates expressions when:
a feature is created.
a sketch is dimensioned.
a feature or sketch is positioned.
Understanding Expressions All expressions have a name, a statement, and a value. NOTE: The total number of characters allowed for the name, equal sign, statement, and comments in an expression is 132. The name is the portion of the expression on the left side of the equal sign. Expression names are alphanumeric strings of text that begin with a letter. Expressions are case sensitive. The statement is the portion displayed on the right side of the equal sign. The statement may be a numeral or an algebraic function and may contain preĆexisting expression names.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The value is the result of the evaluation of the statement portion of the equation within the expression. Example of an Expression Length=.5+2*cos(60)
Name
Statement
1.5
Value
Length is the name of the expression and represents the value 1.5.
4-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Creating and Editing Expressions To work with expressions, choose Tools→Expression.
Name Creation order Reverse creation
The Name Filter
Expression List
Expressions editor and calculator
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Used By
Saving changes to the expressions
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
4-3
Expressions
Creating Expressions There are three methods to create expressions:
System generated expressions (p#).
User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5.00).
Predefined, user created expressions (Thk=0.60, Thk used as a text entry in a parameter field).
Procedure:
Click in the expression editor field and key in the entire expression (for example: rad=1.5).
Press the key. The expression is then added to the Expression List.
Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
Editing Expressions Procedure:
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. It is displayed in the expression editor field.
In the expression editor field, modify the statement (right side of the equal sign). If the name (left side of the equal sign) is modified, a new expression will be created.
Press the key.
Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
Using Information→Feature Many times there is a need to determine what expressions control what features in the model. By choosing Information→Feature, and selecting the feature(s) in question, a listing window will show information about the selected feature(s).
Used by The Used by option provides a means of finding out if an expression is referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression. To use this option, choose Tools→Expression, select the expression and then choose the Used by icon.
4-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions This activity will demonstrate how expressions were created when the block was created in the previous activity. The same block will then be created with the same dimensional values. However, this time logical names for the expressions will be used.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_prim_exp_1 and save as ***_prim_exp_1. Start the Modeling application. Step 2 Examine the Expressions for the Block created in the previous activity.
Choose the Tools→Expression option.
The Edit Expression dialog box shown above lists all of the expressions in the part file. Notice the p0, p1, and p2 expressions. These are default expression names given to the block. Step 3 Delete the Block.
Choose the Delete icon
Select the block in the graphic window and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
from the Standard toolbar.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
4-5
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Expressions
Step 4 Create a new Block.
Choose the Block icon.
Choose Origin, Edge Lengths.
Key in the following expressions:
Length (XC) =
Length=8 (Tab)
Length (YC) =
Width=6 (Tab)
Length (ZC) =
Height=6/2
Choose OK.
Step 5 Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block.
Choose the Tools→Expression option.
The display on the Edit Expression dialog box should be similar to the one shown below. Notice the expressions Height, Length, and Width. These expressions were created during the creation of the block.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
4-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Step 6 Find information about the newly created Block.
Choose the Information→Expression→List All option or select the Information icon Expressions dialog window.
at the bottom of the
The graphic shows the listing window with the information about the feature selected.
Notice that the Height is tied to the numeric value 6/2. This is not the true intent of the design. The true intent is that the Height grows proportionally with the Width. This relationship could not be established upon creation as the Width expression was not in existence. Step 7 Change the expression.
Close the Information window.
Select the Height expression from the Expressions window. The expression is displayed in the expression text editor field.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
4-7
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Expressions
Place the cursor in the text editor field just to the right of the numeral 6 in the 6/2 expression field.
Text Editor Field
Backspace once to delete the numeral 6 and replace it with Width and press Enter.
The value for the expression Height is now changed to Width/2. Any time that the Width changes the value will change accordingly.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 8 Change the Width value.
4-8
Select the Width expression.
Backspace once to delete the numeral 6, replace it with 4 and press Enter.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Choose OK.
Step 9 Save and Close the part.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
4-9
Expressions
SUMMARY
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. Expressions are created when: a feature is created. a sketch is dimensioned. a feature or sketch is positioned. All expressions have a name, a statement, and a value. In this lesson you:
Created Expressions.
Edited Expressions.
Retrieved information through Information→Expression.
ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
4-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Face Operations Lesson 5
PURPOSE
To introduce the Hollow face operation.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Hollow a solid body.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5-1
Face Operations
Face Operations Face Operations are available to provide additional definition to the faces of a model. The Face Operations are Taper, Hollow, and Offset Face .
In this lesson, the Hollow operation will be discussed.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Hollow The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing solid, based upon a specified thickness. The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation. In the figure below, the top face has been selected as the face to be pierced. Thickness
Face to be pierced
Before
After
Wall Thickness Value Positive or negative values may be used as follows:
Positive values will hollow the existing solid so that the wall thickness is measured inward from the original faces of the solid.
Negative values for the wall thickness will result in a hollow that forms a shell of the specified value around the original solid.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5-3
Face Operations
Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Hollow from the main menu will display the following dialog box for hollow creation. Region
Body
Face
Offset face
Pierced face Type Filter
Default Thickness Alternate Thickness
A hollow may be created in three different ways:
The "Face" button may be chosen to select pierced faces individually. The "Region" button may be selected to quickly select a region of faces to be pierced. Since a region of the body is pierced rather than individual faces, any changes in the region are automatically reflected in the hollow. The "Body" button may be selected to create a void region in a body without piercing any faces.
A unique thickness may be assigned for each face with the Offset Face option. When Offset Face is selected the Alternate Thickness text box becomes active. Using variable thickness hollows reduces the number of features in the part, as the offset features are not required, and results in more compact models that are easier to comprehend.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to take material away from the model of a plastic molded part. Step 1 Open the Part File.
Open the part file pau_hair_dryer_1, and start the Modeling application.
The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed.
Right
Step 2 Inspect the Part.
Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part to verify that the solid requires hollowing.
Step 3 Hollow the solid and pierce the proper faces.
Set the display mode back to Wireframe the view (third mouse button).
EDS All Rights Reserved
and Restore
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5-5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Face Operations
Choose the Hollow icon toolbar.
from the Feature Operation
Enter a Default Thickness of 2.
Select the right, and back side faces to pierce.
After both of the desired faces are selected to be pierced, choose OK twice. The finished part is shown below.
Back side face
Right face
Step 4 Inspect the Part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part (third mouse button).
Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
5-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to create a sheet metal part. Step 1 Open the Part File.
Open the part file pau_hollow_1, and start the Modeling application.
The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed.
Front
Step 2 Create a hollow feature.
Choose the Hollow icon.
Enter a Default Thickness of .12.
Select the 5 following faces to pierce: front, back, left, right, and bottom.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5-7
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Face Operations
After all the desired faces are selected to be pierced, choose OK twice. The finished part is shown below.
Choose Edit→Undo List→Hollow.
Repeat the operation with a thickness of -.12 and examine the result.
Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset This simple activity will demonstrate the application of a hollow feature with an offset face. Step 1 Open the Part File.
Open the part file pau_hollow_2, and start the Modeling application.
Step 2 Hollow the solid.
Choose the Hollow icon.
Enter a Default Thickness of 4.
Select the faces to pierce as shown below. Select the 3 faces that are NOT shaded.
Choose the Offset Face icon.
Key in an Alternate Thickness of 8.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-9
Face Operations
Select the face to offset as shown below.
Select this face to offset.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Close the part, do not save.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
SUMMARY
The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing solid, based upon a specified thickness. In addition, selected faces may be assigned various offset thickness. In this lesson you:
Specified a Default Thickness.
Specified a Alternate Thickness.
Specified Faces to be Pierced.
Specified Faces to be Offset.
Created a Hollow Feature.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5-11
Face Operations
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations Lesson 6
PURPOSE
To introduce Blend and Chamfer edge operations.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create Blends.
Create Chamfers.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-1
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Edge Operations ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a ÏÏÏ Edge model. The Edge Operations are Edge Blend and Chamfer.
6-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Edge Blend This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid body. The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Selected edge
Blend radius
Blend radius
Shortened faces
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations
Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field With the cursor selection set to General Objects, an edge may be blended by first selecting the edge(s) in the graphics window, then the third mouse button is used to access a pop-up menu. From this menu, the Blend operation is chosen and a Radius value may be input directly on the graphics screen. The edge blend is automatically created as a preview.
When you achieve the desired radius value, choose the checkmark in the upper left corner of the graphics screen.
6-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
You can also access the full Blend Dialog by choosing the Blend Dialog icon at the upper left corner of the graphics screen. By choosing the Blend Dialog, you may make changes to the Blend default settings.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields ÏÏÏ In this activity you will create Edge Blends using the MB3 pop-up menu and 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ onĆscreen Dynamic Input Fields. Step 1 Open the part pau_edge_blend_1 and choose the Modeling application. You will create Edge Blends using the new functionality.
Step 2 Create the first Edge Blend.
6-6
Ensure the Select General Objects icon Selection toolbar.
Choose the edge shown above, click MB3 and choose the Blend option.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
is ON in the
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .75. Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.
.75
Choose the Checkmark at the upper left corner of the graphics window to apply the radius.
Step 3 Create the second Edge Blend.
Choose the edge shown below , click MB3 and choose the Blend option.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-7
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .5 . Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.
Notice that the tangent edges were automatically selected. That is because the Add Tangent Edges toggle is on in the Blend dialog.
.5
If you chose OK at this point, only part of the edge would be blended. Instead you would like to blend the entire left side of the part. To do this, you must manually select the additional edges. Note: At this point, if you wanted to make changes to the Edge Blend default settings, you could choose the Blend Dialog icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen and make the desired changes.
6-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Select the two additional edges at the left side of the part. If Enable Blend Preview is toggled ON in the dialog, you will see a preview of each blend as the edge is selected. If Blend Preview does not display, you can choose the Blend Dialog icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen and toggle Enable Blend Preview ON.
Choose the Checkmark icon
to apply the blends.
Step 4 Close the part without saving.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-9
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Chamfer This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer dimensions. There are five methods of creating a chamfer:
Single Offset
Double Offset
Offset Angle
Freeform Single Offset (Outside scope of class)
Freeform Double Offset (Outside scope of class)
The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected. Outside Chamfer
Shortened faces
Inside Chamfer
Selected edge Selected edge
Chamfer
Chamfer Shortened faces
Removes Material
6-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Adds material
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
Single Offset This option allows a chamfer to be placed with an offset that is the same along both faces, as shown in the figure below (offset 1 and offset 2 have the same value). This value must be a positive value. Offset 1
Selected edge
Face 2 Offset 2
Face 1
The single offset shown below is measured along the path of the curved face and is not necessarily a linear distance. Offset
Selected edge
Face 2
Chamfer Face 1
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-11
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Double Offset This option allows different offsets to be placed along the faces. Both of the offset values must be positive and applied as shown below. Second offset
Selected edge
Face 1 First offset
Chamfer
Face 2
Offset Angle This option allows an offset value and the chamfer angle to be entered. Note that the chamfer angle is measured from the second face selected. NOTE: The option of flipping the chamfer is available if the display is not what is desired.
Angle
Selected edge
Face 1 Offset Chamfer
Face 2
6-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation In this activity, a chamfer will be placed on different edges of the model. Step 1 Open the part file.
Open pau_chamfer_1 and make sure you're in the Modeling application.
Step 2 Create a chamfer using offset and angle.
Choose the Chamfer icon.
Choose Offset Angle option.
Select Edge 1 as shown below.
Edge 1
Choose OK.
Key in the following parameters: Offset = 1.75 Angle = 30
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-13
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The model should appear as shown below.
Edge 2
Step 3 Create a double offset chamfer.
Choose the Double Offset option.
Select Edge 2 as shown above.
Choose OK.
Key in the following parameters: First Offset =
.25
Second Offset = .5
Choose OK and note the option to Flip Last Chamfer.
Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
6-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SUMMARY
The Edge Blend and Chamfer Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a model. In this lesson you:
Blended different edges.
Chamfered edges using Offset Angle
Chamfered edges using Double Offset.
Became aware of the Flip Last Chamfer option.
Became aware that all blended edges or chamfered edges created in a single operation are considered one feature.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
6-15
Edge Operations
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
6-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Model Construction Query Lesson 7
PURPOSE To demonstrate different methods available to query a part file. Querying a part file is useful in that a user may gain an understanding of the part's design intent and how the part was created. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Retrieve Layer Information.
Open and close the Model Navigator.
Retrieve Feature Information.
Retrieve Expression Information.
Playback the model construction.
Suppress & Unsuppress Features.
Identify where expressions are used.
Measure the distance between objects.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-1
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
Visually Inspect the Part Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the model to view the different features. At times this is very beneficial in order to see clearly what is displayed on the screen. The model may be rotated by using the middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View toolbar. Depending upon the graphics driver being used, this may be done with the model shaded or displayed as wireframe. These display modes may also be controlled using the View toolbar.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Refresh
Fit
Zoom
Zoom Rotate In/Out
Pan
Wireframe Settings
Shaded Settings
Wireframe
View Orientation
Inspect the Layers Layers are used to organize a part file. They work like invisible containers to house the different objects used to create a Unigraphics solid model. Things to look for:
7-2
Object Count: Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox will change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects contained on each layer.
Category Names: Unigraphics offers the ability to name layers or groups of layers using Categories. The Category Names are listed in the Category listing window on the Layer Settings dialog box as well as in the Layer/Status listing window next to assigned layers when Show Category Names is enabled.
Layer Listing: There is a filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog box that allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Objects, Layers with Objects, or All Selectable Layers.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Model Navigator The Model Navigator may be used to identify the different features of the model. Selecting a feature from the Model Navigator window will highlight the selected feature in the graphics area and will also highlight the parent and/or child features of the selected feature in different colors. Conversely, selecting a feature from the graphics area will highlight the selected feature and its parents/children in the Model Navigator window. The Model Navigator allows the display of features to be temporarily removed (suppressed) from the graphics screen by selecting the check box associated with the feature name. When a check is displayed in the box, the feature is displayed in the graphics area. The Model Navigator also allows various editing functions to be performed from a central location. Holding down the third mouse button causes a feature specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar. Both, by default, are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window.
UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar
Windows: Icon from Resource Bar
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-3
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
Information The Information pull down from the main menu offers a number of options for obtaining information about the model. Some of the most useful menu options when trying to interrogate a model are listed below with a brief description of what they do.
Information→Feature Information→Feature may be used to identify Parent/Child relationships between the selected feature and the other features in the model. In addition, expressions that control the feature may be displayed in the graphic screen by toggling Display Dimensions on.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
TIP
When using Information→Feature, the feature may also be selected in the graphics window. The feature will then be highlighted in the Feature Browser window. Choose OK or Apply to bring up the Information window which will display the relative expressions.
Information→Expression→List All Examining the expressions may reveal associativity that is built between features or the expressions associated to them.
Information→Expression→List All by Reference Information→Expression→List All by Reference allows expressions that reference other expressions to be identified, as well as identifying to what features these expressions belong. The Edit→Find option within the Information Window allows easy navigation through the listing.
Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress In regards to investigating how a model was created, the Playback and Suppress/Unsuppress functions (found under Edit→Feature from the Menu Bar or in the Edit Feature toolbar) will allow the user to reconstruct the model and watch the progress graphically. On very large models, users will have to weigh the invested time vs. the amount of information that can be learned to determine if it is an acceptable practice for a particular model. The main differences between these two methods is that Playback does not suppress reference features or sketches. However, Playback does allow editing of features during update, where Suppress/Unsuppress does not.
7-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Expression Used by option Features may be identified that have an association to a particular expression by using the Used by" option found in the Expressions dialog window. To use:
Choose Tools→Expressions
Select the expression.
Choose the Used by icon.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
An Information window pops up identifying the features that are using the selected expression.
Identified feature
Used by
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-5
Model Construction Query
Analysis Distance The Analysis→Distance function obtains the minimum distance between any two Unigraphics objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or faces. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the two-dimensional distance relative to the XC, YC plane. In addition, it returns the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work coordinate systems. The graphics window will indicate the distance measured by a temporary line.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
All data in the Information window is converted to the current units. You can change the units of measure in the Information window using Analysis→Units, and then choosing OK. Once the Information window has displayed the results, you can verify the distance between one of the selected objects and a new object. Just select a new first object, and then select one of the previously selected objects. The new distance is then displayed in the Information window. You can continue verifying distances between one of the selected objects and any other object as long as you specify the new unselected object first.
7-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Start Points In cases where multiple closest points exist, you may wish to specify a point to indicate the region of the selected object in which you'd like the system to calculate the distance. Use Start Point lets you indicate a start point for a selected curve or face object. Use Start Point toggles from No to Yes. When you set the toggle to Yes and select a curve or face, the system displays the Point Subfunction menu, which allows you to select the desired start point for the curve or face. Use this option to distinguish between multiple points on an object when the selection of more than one is possible. For example, if there exists more than one pair of points that are normal to both objects, the system may not produce the desired results unless you indicate a start point to use, as shown below.
In this case, you want to specify the minimum distance between point A and a certain area of spline B. If no start point is specified, the system may indicate the minimum distance here.
But if you specify a start point as shown, the system knows which minimum distance you are looking for,
Point A
Spline B
Specified start point
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-7
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
Activity 1 - Model Construction Query This activity deals with identifying different feature relationships and design intent. Although detailed instructions are supplied, it may be beneficial to attempt to navigate through the interface without using them. Step 1 Open pau_arm_1 and start the Modeling application.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 2 Visually Inspect the Model. Inspect the model. As the part is rotated, try to identify different features and the possible methods used to create them.
Rotate the model (hold down MB2 and drag in graphics window).
Choose the Shaded icon.
Rotate the model (MB2).
Orient the view back to trimetric using the Trimetric icon
(View toolbar)
in the View toolbar. Step 3 Inspect the Layers. Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of how complex a model may be. If there is only 1 object on a solids layer and just a few objects on a curves layer, the model may be a simple extrusion.
7-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Choose the Layer Settings icon.
(Utility toolbar)
Toggle ON the Show Category Names options.
Review the listing for category names and object count.
Notice that there is 1 object on a Solids layer, 8 objects on a Sketches layer and 3 objects on a Datums layer. Step 4 Identify the Different Features using the Model Navigator.
Choose the Wireframe icon interior features (View toolbar).
Make layers 1, 21, and 61 selectable so that the construction aids may be seen.
Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog box.
Choose the Fit icon
Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required. Either option should be located vertically on the Right side of the graphics window.
EDS All Rights Reserved
if required to better view
in the View toolbar.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-9
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator. This will also adjust the graphics window to fit the part within the viewing area.
Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list, select the first feature with MB1. The corresponding feature will be highlighted in the graphic window as well as the parent (pau_arm_1) and its children (S21_SKETCH(3)). Continue through all features to see which is which.
Step 5 Review the model construction using Playback.
Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar.
from the Edit
Feature Playback
7-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference features and the sketch. The Edit during Update dialog box informs you that the FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) feature has been updated, this is the base feature of the model.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Choose the Step icon.
The next feature, FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(1), is updated. You may have to move the slider to read the entire message displayed in the Edit during Update dialog box.
Choose the Step icon again.
The next feature , FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(2), is updated.
Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-11
Model Construction Query
Step 6 Review the model construction using Suppress/Unsuppress.
Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list, select the checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to suppress the feature.
Note that all of the features in the list, except for two fixed datum axes, become suppressed. This is due to all of the other features in the model sharing some sort of associativity with these reference features. To get a better idea about direct associativity to features we will change the listing method of the Model Navigator.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator, select MB3 and choose the Quick Look option from the drop-down list.
Click MB3 here
Notice that all of the features in the list, except for the two fixed datum axis, branch out under the first feature in the list. The Quick Look option shows the parent/child relationships in a tree structure format.
Suppress the two Fixed Datum Axis by selecting the checkboxes to remove the checkmark.
Before unsuppressing the features we will change the listing method back to Timestamp Order. This will give us a true creation order listing and will show what features where created from first to last.
7-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
TIP
Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator, select MB3 and choose the Timestamp Order option from the drop-down list.
Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list, select the empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to unsuppress the feature.
Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining features, one at a time, by selecting on each of the empty checkboxes with MB1.
You can also use the Shift and CTRL keys to select multiple features from the Model Navigator and then use MB3 one any of the selected features to Suppress/Unsuppress them together. Step 7 Find the values that control the Thickness of the Web Extrusion.
In the Model Navigator, place the cursor on WEB_EXTRUSION(4), press MB3 and select Information.
Scroll through the Information window to see the various parameters and controlling expressions.
The expressions p8 and p9 are identified as limits 1 and 2, these expressions control the start and end distances from the generator geometry for the extrusion. The values of -.125 and .125 produce a web thickness of .25. Note that the Parent of this feature is the sketch S21:SKETCH (3).
Close the Information window.
Step 8 Identify the Expression that Controls the Distance from the Large Hole Center to the Small Hole Center. Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry, the obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to hole distance is in the sketch.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-13
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
In the Model Navigator, place the cursor on S21:SKETCH(3), press MB3 and select Edit Parameters.
Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar. Click here and select the Front icon
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The expression in question can clearly be identified, arm_length=8.5
Orient the view back to the Trimetric using the View toolbar.
Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog box.
Step 9 Close the Model Navigator.
Choose the Model Navigator icon
again (UNIX) to
close the Model Navigator or select the tack icon again (Windows) and drag the cursor off the Model Navigator to collapse it. Step 10 Determine how the Large Hole Feature is located. To find the answer to this question, you will select a feature directly from the graphics screen rather than from a list, which can take more time when trying to identify a specific feature.
7-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Choose Information→Feature.
Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphic window and accept it if necessary. You can zoom, pan or rotate the part to get a better look at the feature.
Choose MB2.
The information window pops up. It can be seen that p17 is a parallel positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero). The logical assumption can be made that the hole is located Point to Point relative to the Large Knuckle extrusion. This finding can be further confirmed by the following actions.
Close the Information window.
Choose the Edit Positioning icon Feature toolbar.
Select LARGE_THRU_HOLE(7) and choose MB2.
from the Edit
The p17 expression appears at the arc center of the extrusion and hole. If you don't see the expression, rotate the part.
Cancel the Edit Positioning dialog box.
Step 11 Identify where an expression is used.
Choose Tools→Expression.
Select the expression, small_dia=1.25.
Choose the Used by icon.
The information window appears and the expression is identified as one used on an object A2 in the S21:SKETCH(3) feature.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-15
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Model Construction Query
Close the Information window and cancel the Expression dialog box.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select S21:SKETCH(3).
Choose the Object Dependency Browser button.
The child objects of the sketch are listed; notice that A2 is present.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Select ArcĆA2.
The arc is highlighted in the graphic window. The expression's associated feature and object has now been identified.
Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.
Step 12 Measure a distance.
7-16
Using the Layer Settings icon layer and all other layers invisible.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
, make layer 21 the work
Unigraphics NX
Model Construction Query
Choose Analysis"Distance.
Choose the Point Constructor button.
Choose the Quadrant Point icon.
Select the arc as shown below.
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Select the arc here.
Choose the Point Constructor button again.
The Quadrant Point is still selected.
Select the other arc as shown below.
Select the arc here.
The Information window appears and the 3ĆD and 2ĆD distances should report a value of 10.625. Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
7-17
Model Construction Query
SUMMARY
ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
In this lesson you were instructed on how to query a model to determine creation method and design intent. These skills are important because of the need to review part files that have been created by other users. In this lesson, you:
7-18
Opened the Model Navigator.
Identified Expressions.
Reviewed the model construction using Playback.
Reviewed the model construction using Suppress & Unsuppress.
Identified where an expression was used.
Measured a distance.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Introduction to Assemblies Lesson 8
PURPOSE
To introduce the Unigraphics Assembly Modeling application.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Activate the Assemblies application.
Set your Load Options.
Add Components to an assembly.
Reposition Components in an assembly.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
8-1
Introduction to Assemblies
Definitions and Descriptions Assembly An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies. In the figure below, the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many components.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
SubĆAssembly A subĆassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level assembly. The figure below shows the subĆassembly of the Integrated Circuit board for the toy laser gun. A subĆassembly has components of its own.
8-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Component Objects A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the assembly back to the master component part. A component object can also be a subĆassembly made up of other component parts and/or component objects. Shown below are component objects of the sub-assembly. Every piece of the Integrated Circuit board is a separate component object. Component Object Component Objects
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-3
Introduction to Assemblies
Component Parts A component part is a part file pointed to by a component object within an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is referenced, not copied, by the assembly. The term piece part is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside of an assembly.
Top level assembly
component
component
piece part
piece part
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
SubĆassembly This is a component part of the top level assembly.
8-4
component
component
component
piece part
piece part
piece part
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Component parts of the subĆassembly
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
General Assembly Concepts There are two basic ways to define an assembly model.
TopĆDown Modeling
BottomĆUp Modeling (Demonstrated in this manual)
TopĆDown Modeling As the name suggests, an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and parts are filed down the hierarchy, creating subĆassemblies and components.
BottomĆUp Modeling A BottomĆUp assembly modeling approach starts by identifying the lowest level piece parts that will make up the assembly. Component parts and subĆassemblies are created as the process moves up the assembly level hierarchy.
Combining Both Approaches It may be more practical for the methods to be combined. For example, purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the bottomĆup method, new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a top down mode as the design progresses, and finally existing fasteners may be added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library.
Designing in Context The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed in context. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. Edits can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part. If a component exists several times in the assembly (i.e. a fastener), any change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other occurrences as well.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Assemblies
Bottom Up Design In the BottomĆUp approach, component parts are designed separate from the assembly and later added to the assembly. This approach applies to purchased parts or existing parts. First, the pin is created in a separate part file outside the assembly.
Then, the pin is added to the assembly as a component.
locator_pin.prt
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
All assemblies are automatically updated, when opened, to reflect changes made to the component parts. If hole features are added to the solid in a component part they will be seen in all occurrences of the components in the assembly when it is opened.
8-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Introduction to Load Options When an assembly part file is opened using File→Open, the system must find and load any component parts that are referenced by that assembly. Load Options establish how and from where the system loads the component parts. The Load Options dialog box is accessed by choosing File→Options→Load Options.
Where to look for component parts Which components will be loaded
Controls whether components are fully or partially loaded
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Controls what to do if a component is not found
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-7
Introduction to Assemblies
Load Method The Load Method determines where the system will search for the component parts when an assembly is opened. There are three possible settings.
The As Saved method looks for each component part in the same directory it was in when the assembly was last saved.
The From Directory method looks for each component in the same directory as the assembly part.
The Search Directories method looks for each component in directories specified in a userĆdefined list.
Load States The Load Options also controls whether component parts will be fully loaded, partially loaded, or unloaded when an assembly is opened. These are referred to as load states.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fully Loaded A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory. All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option to All Components and toggling Use Partial Loading to off before opening the assembly.
Partially Loaded When a part is partially loaded, the system pulls only the data required to display the part into memory. Components will be partially loaded if Partial Loading is toggled on when the assembly is opened. Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves performance. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies.
8-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Unloaded A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened. Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load Components option to No Components before opening the assembly. This will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system performance but no component geometry will be seen. Individual components or subassemblies may be opened as desired to work on them using File→Open.
Load Failure The Abort Load on Failure option controls how the system behaves if a component part is not found based on the current load method.
When toggled On, the system will not load any parts unless all of the components are found. The first component it is unable to find will be listed in an Open Error window.
When toggled Off, the system will open the assembly and load any of the components that it can find. Those components that are not found will be listed in an Open Warning window and left unloaded.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-9
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Assemblies
Component Editing A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or the Add Existing button in the Components PullĆDown menu under Assemblies. Turn ON the Assemblies application to access the Assemblies toolbar or the Components PullĆDown menu. This toolbar/menu contains most of the functions that affect the hierarchical structure of the assembly and the relationships between components. The Assemblies toolbar and the Components PullĆDown menu will be available as long as the Assemblies application is turned ON.
1 3 4
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
5
2
or
2 1
8-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
The component part to add is specified in the Select Part dialog box.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
There are several ways to identify the part in this dialog box:
Select the Choose Part File button to retrieve an unopened part.
Select a previously loaded part from the list.
Enter the name of a previously loaded part.
Select an existing component in the graphics window.
Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator display.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-11
Introduction to Assemblies
After the part is identified, the Add Existing Part dialog box appears so that it may be established how the existing part will be added as a component object to the assembly and what information is stored with it. At this time, the only change from defaults will be the placement of the part on the Original layers.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Reference Set Ć Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from each component and viewed in the context of an assembly.
Default reference sets are, Empty and Entire Part.
Reference sets may be manually created or automatically created.
NOTE: In order for a BODY" reference set to be created automatically the following line must be set in the ug_english.def and ug_mectric.def environment files. Assemblies_ModelReferenceSet: BODY Layer Options - Defines which layer the objects in the new component will be added to in the current work part.
8-12
Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current work layer.
Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layer in which it resides in the component part file.
As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer specified in the Specified Layer entry field.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open at the same time either implicitly as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly or explicitly through the use of File→Open. The part file, whether it be an assembly or component, that is currently displayed in the graphics window, is called the Displayed Part. The Displayed Part can be changed by:
Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option.
Choosing Window→More Parts (Change Displayed Part dialog box)
Choosing the Window Loaded Part List, which contains up to the last ten loaded parts for selection to be the displayed part.
Using the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu. (this will not be covered in this manual)
Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a component for modification or the extraction of data is required. This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach, where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Components option.
Select Components
Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.
Components
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-13
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Assemblies
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.
Reset All icons not shown
Select All
Deselect All
Up One Level
Once an object has been selected from the graphic window, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
8-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Window Choosing Window→More Parts will activate the Change Displayed Part dialog box, listing all loaded parts except the one currently displayed.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
When this dialog box is active, a part may be selected by:
Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.
Entering the name in the Part Name entry field.
Selecting geometry from the graphics area (if the current displayed part is an assembly).
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-15
Introduction to Assemblies
The Work Part The part in which geometry is created and edited is termed the Work Part. The Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is contained in the displayed assembly part. When a part file is opened, it will initially be both the displayed and the work part. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. In a case where the displayed part is not the work part, the work part will be displayed in color and the other component parts will be deĆemphasized. The Work Part can be changed by:
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option.
Choosing the Make Work Part icon
Choosing Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part.
Using the Assembly Navigator popĆup menu. (not covered in this manual).
on the Assemblies tool bar.
NOTE: When a component is made the work part, the component's reference set is changed to Entire Part. When the component is no longer the work part, the reference set is returned to its original condition.
Selection Toolbar
Select Components
Once an object has been selected from the graphic window, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.
8-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Make Work Part icon Choosing the Make Work Part icon dialog box.
EDS All Rights Reserved
will activate the Set Work Part
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-17
Introduction to Assemblies
When this dialog is active, a part may be identified by:
Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.
Selecting geometry from the graphics screen.
Entering the part name in the Part Name entry field.
Choosing the Displayed Part button changes the work part back to the whole assembly. This makes the displayed part and the work part the same.
Repositioning Components To access the Reposition Components dialog, the Assemblies application must first be turned ON. The Reposition Components dialog can be accessed by:
Choosing Reposition Component icon
on the Assemblies tool bar.
Choosing Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
8-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
After Reposition Component is chosen and a component object is selected the repositioning dialog appears and a dynamic repositioning coordinate system appears in the graphic window. Rotate About A Line
Translate
Point to Point
Rotate About A Point
Rotate Between Two Axes
Reposition
Rotation Handle
Vertex Handle
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Axis Handle
Dynamic Repositioning Coordinate System
Component objects may be repositioned by using the six options at the top of the dialog window or interactively dragged using the dynamic coordinate system.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-19
Introduction to Assemblies
Dragging Components Objects Component objects may be dragged three different ways:
LeftĆRight UpĆDown
Along an Axis of the coordinate system
Rotated about an axis of the coordinate system.
LeftĆRight UpĆDown After the component object has been selected, it may be dragged left or right and up or down, simply by placing the cursor any where in the graphic window and holding MB1 down. If one of the coordinate system's axis or rotation handles is currently selected, you must first select the vertex handle to deselect the other handles. To move the component in the third dimension, while the object is selected, rotate the part using your spaceball or MB3 Rotate (F7), exit the rotation mode and continue to drag the object.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected, it may be dragged along an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the axis handles. In addition the Distance and Snap Increment text fields become active. Axis Handle
Distance field Snap Increment field
Snap Increment toggle
Keying in a positive or negative value in the distance text field and pressing return will cause the object to be moved that distance value along the selected axis. The Snap Increment value acts as a detent, which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged along the axis. The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired.
8-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected, it may be dragged about an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the rotation handles. In addition the Angle and Snap Increment text fields become active. Rotation Handle
Angle field Snap Increment field
Snap Increment toggle
Keying in a positive or negative value in the angle text field and pressing return will cause the object to be rotated that value about the respective axis. The Snap Increment value acts as a detent, which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged about the axis. The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired.
Point to Point Point to Point allows a component to be translated by indicating a first point and a second point. The orientation of the translated component with respect to the second point will be identical to that of the original component with respect to the first point. Second Point (arc center)
First Point (arc center)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-21
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Assemblies
Translate Translate provides a means to move a component a delta value with respect to the reposition coordinate system. Translated components maintain the original orientation relative to other parts.
Rotate About a Point
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
This option may be used to rotate components about a vector parallel to the ZC axis and passing through a specified reference point, as shown below. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. Component being repositioned
Axis of Rotation
Reference Point ZC YC
Angle = 90 degrees
XC
ZC YC XC
8-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Rotate About a Line This option allows components to be rotated about a defined vector which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. To use this method:
Define a point that the vector is to pass through.
Define the vector using the Vector constructor.
Key in the desired value of rotation.
Choose Apply.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise relative to the defined vector. Component being repositioned
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Defined vector
Axis of Rotation
Angle=90 degrees
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-23
Introduction to Assemblies
Saving the Work Part After editing, the work part must be saved to keep the modifications. The File→Save option allows the saving of the work part without saving all of the parts in the displayed assembly.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
8-24
If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component), only that part will be saved.
If the work part is an assembly or subassembly, any modified component parts below it are also saved. Higher level assemblies will not be saved even if they were modified.
TIP
File"Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been modified regardless of the work part designation.
TIP
Open files for which the user does not have write privilege may not be saved.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component In this activity components will be added to an assembly. These components will then be repositioned to the proper locations. The Load Options must be set properly before loading the assembly. Step 1 Set the Load Options.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Ensure Load Method is set to From Directory.
Ensure Use Partial Loading is turned ON.
Choose OK.
Step 2 Open the test stand assembly.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Open icon.
From the laser_gun subdirectory, open the part pau_test_assm_1.
Save the part as ***_test_assm_1 where *** represent your initials.
Choose the Modeling icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-25
Introduction to Assemblies
Choose the Assemblies icon.
Step 3 Add the test stand to the assembly. The test stand is the part that the circuit board fits in for assembly and circuitry testing.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Add Existing Components icon Assemblies toolbar.
from the
Choose Choose Part File.
From the laser_gun subdirectory, select pau_mounting_block.
Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK.
Choose Reset and OK.
Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog box.
Fit the view.
The illustration below shows how the mounting block is to be oriented to the circuit board. The next step will direct you through the repositioning of the mounting block.
8-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Step 4 Reposition the mounting block.
Choose the Reposition Component icon.
Select the mounting block and choose MB2.
Select the rotation handle shown below. Select this rotation handle.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Change the Snap Increment to 15.
Ensure that Snap Increment is toggled ON.
Drag the selected rotation handle with MB1 until the angle text field indicates -90.
Choose the Point to Point icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-27
Introduction to Assemblies
Select the first and second points as directed by the CUE line and shown below.
Second point
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
First point
The mounting block moves to the new position.
8-28
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Step 5 Add a new component to the subassembly.
In the graphic window, select the pau_ic_board_13 as shown below and confirm if necessary. (Verify the component name in the Status line)
Select here
Place the cursor over the component and select MB3.
Choose Make Work Part from the Pop-Up menu.
Choose OK to acknowledge the Read Only warning.
Choose the Add Existing Component icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
8-29
Introduction to Assemblies
Choose Choose Part File.
Select the part pau_c2_13 and choose MB2.
Change the Positioning method to Reposition.
Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK.
Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box, followed by OK to locate the part at Zero.
Fit the view.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Newly added component.
8-30
Choose the Point to Point icon.
Choose the Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center icon.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Reposition the component as shown below. It may be necessary to rotate and zoom in on the view so that the proper arc centers are selected (Remember: Holding down MB2 and dragging the cursor on the graphic window rotates the view).
Select this arc center as the Second point
Select this arc center as the First point
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The component moves to the new position.
Choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Step 6 Save the subassembly. Since you do not presently have write access to the subassembly you will perform a saveĆas on it.
Choose File→Save As.
In your home directory save the circuit board assembly by keying in ***_ic_board_13 and choose OK.
The system now prompts you to perform a saveĆas on the top level assembly. You already own this part file, so this step is not necessary.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-31
Introduction to Assemblies
Choose Cancel.
Choose OK to continue the SaveĆAs.
Choose OK to acknowledge the SaveĆAs Report.
Close the Information window.
Step 7 Make the Work Part the Displayed Part.
Choose the Make Work Part icon toolbar.
Choose Displayed Part.
from the Assemblies
Step 8 Save and close the assembly.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose File→Close→Save All and Close.
Choose OK to confirm the close.
Step 9 Reopen the saved assembly. This step will demonstrate the importance of Load Options.
Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1.
A warning message appears. Currently the load options are set to look for the component parts in the same directory as the assembly part file. Your assembly file is saved in your home directory while the component parts are stored in the course parts directory.
8-32
Choose OK to accept the warning.
Choose File→Close→All Parts.
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Assemblies
Step 10 Set the Load Options.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Toggle the As Saved option ON.
Choose OK.
Step 11 Reopen the saved assembly.
Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1.
This time all of the components are opened. Step 12 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
8-33
Introduction to Assemblies
SUMMARY
An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies. Assemblies may be created using the TopĆDown, BottomĆUp, or a combination of the two methods. Assemblies provides the ability to design in context.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
In this lesson you:
8-34
Activated the Assemblies application.
Set your Load Options.
Added and repositioned a component in an assembly.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
The Master Model Lesson 9
PURPOSE
To introduce the Master Model concept.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Review an existing Master Model.
Create a new Master Model.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-1
The Master Model
The Assembly Modeler The Unigraphics assembly is a file containing stored links to the part files that are pieces of the assembly. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the assembly resides in the original part file only, there is no duplication in the assembly file. A link in the assembly file is referred to as a component object. A component object stores information about the piece part such as its location, attributes, origin, orientation, permissions, degree of display, and its relationship to other parts.
The Master Model Concept Applying the Master Model Concept in a Drafting situation is simply the creation of an assembly consisting of one component part. It is valuable as a means of promoting concurrent engineering. The person responsible for the design of a part is not the same person responsible for all of the downstream applications performed on the part. These downstream applications may include drafting, manufacturing, analysis, etc. The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. The downstream user will have write privileges to the assembly file, but only read privileges to the model. The solid model is referenced for the application work, but the downstream user will not have the ability to change it.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Because the application information in the assembly or non-master file is referencing the original master model part, edits to the master model will be updated in the non-master part file. Implementing Master Model theory allows diverse yet dependent design processes to access the same master geometry during development. Therefore, the entire part creation process becomes more efficient allowing many disciplines to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be automatically updated in non-master parts.
9-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development.
Drafting
Assembly
Master Model
Analysis
N/C
Each application uses a separate assembly file. When the Master Model is revised, the other applications will automatically update with minimal or no associativity loss. The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained through protection of the Master Model.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-3
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The Master Model
Master Model Example Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices, define machining operations, and designate cutter tools and save this data in their models. By creating a manufacturing assembly" and adding a component to it, they can then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate part file which references the master geometry:
This avoids duplication of model geometry
Different users can work in separate files simultaneously abcd1234_mfg.prt
(owned by manufacturing engineer)
Contains manufacturing data and a component object which references master model part
abcd1234.prt
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
(owned by designer)
Contains master model geometry
The manufacturing engineer has ownership of the assembly file without necessarily having write access to the master model which is owned by the designer.
9-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Master Model Drawing Guidelines
1. Create the 'drawing' file (Open seedpart_mm or seedpart_in, FILE→SAVE AS, xxxxxxx_dwg)
2. Start the Assemblies application (APPLICATION→ASSEMBLIES)
3. Add the part to be detailed as a component (ASSEMBLIES→COMPONENTS→ADD EXISTING)
4. Change to the Drafting Application (APPLICATION→DRAFTING)
5. Adjust the paper; name, units, size, projection angle (DRAWING→EDIT)
6. Add the drawing formats; title block, border, revision block, standard notes (Site dependent)
7. Set View Display Preferences; hidden line removal, section backgrounds, threads (PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY)
8. Add the first 'Imported' view; typically top or front (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→IMPORT VIEW)
9. Add more views; orthographic, detail, auxiliary, section, isometric, exploded (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEW)
10. Adjust the views; scale, move, align, remove (DRAWING→EDIT VIEW)
11. Adjust the View Display Preferences, per view (PREFERENCES→VIEW DISPLAY)
12. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits; erase object, edit entire object, edit object segment (EDIT→VIEW DEPENDENT EDIT)
13. Add the Utility Symbols; centerlines, target symbols, intersection symbols (INSERT→UTILITY SYMBOL)
14. Add the dimensions (INSERT→DIMENSION)
15. Add the notes, labels, and GD&T's (INSERT→ANNOTATION)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-5
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The Master Model
Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate the advantages of a Master Model Assembly. Step 1 Choose File"Options"Load Options and ensure that the Load Method is From Directory.
Step 2 Open the part file pau_tapedisp_dwg. Make sure that you are selecting pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Step 3 Choose Drafting. Step 4 Inspect the drawing for dimensional values.
Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .88 and the corner radius of .12. Both dimensions have been rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Slot Width
Corner Radius
9-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Restore the view and note the drawing name, SH1, at the lower left corner.
Step 5 Investigate the model.
Choose Modeling.
Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no features.
Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no expressions.
Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.
An information window appears showing the assembly file structure for the file pau_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is one component named pau_tapedisp. This part contains the Master Model definition.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Close the information window.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-7
The Master Model
Step 6 Examine the display.
Choose Information→Object. Place the cursor over the solid body. When the cursor changes to the cross with the ellipsis (+...) select once. Pass the cursor over the numbers in the QuickPick window until the solid body is highlighted, then select it.
Choose OK.
An information window appears with information regarding the solid, its owning part, and confirmation that it is a component.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Dismiss the information window.
Step 7 Retrieve the Master Model file.
Choose Open.
Choose pau_tapedisp from the list box.
Step 8 Edit the expression for Roll_width to .75
9-8
Choose Tools→Expression.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Select the Roll_width expression.
Replace the .875 value with .75 and choose OK.
The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate the modified dimension. Step 9 Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-9
The Master Model
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the Blend(21) feature at the bottom of the list. Confirm the selection with OK.
In the Radius Dynamic Input Field, key in a new value of .06.
Choose OK.
Choose OK.
Step 10 Change Displayed Part to pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Choose Window→pau_tapedisp_dwg to change the Displayed Part.
Choose Drafting.
Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to remind you the views are not updated.
9-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
Step 11 Update the drawing.
Choose Drawing→Update Views.
Choose All in the Update Views dialog box and choose OK.
Step 12 Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master model reflected on the drawing Slot Width
Corner Radius
Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-11
The Master Model
Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate creation of a Master Model Assembly. Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in. Step 2 Save the part as ***_dwg_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 3 Add the part pau_dwg_1 to the discipline specific assembly file.
Check to see the Assemblies application is toggled on (Choose Application→Assemblies, if it is not on).
Choose the Add Existing Component icon.
Choose the Choose Part File button.
Choose pau_dwg_1 from the parts directory, then OK.
Change the Positioning option to Absolute.
Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK.
Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box, followed by OK to locate the part at Zero.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Choose Save. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
9-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
The Master Model
SUMMARY
This Master Model approach offers many benefits to Unigraphics customers. If these two files were readĆprotected by different departments, distinct responsibilities would be enforced by the protection and yet all of the appropriate model data is shared by each of the departments concerned. Users can access whatever they want, whenever they want with full confidence that no data or revision work can be lost without active confirmation by the users.
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
9-13
The Master Model
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
9-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Introduction to Drafting Lesson 10
PURPOSE This lesson will introduce the fundamentals of the Unigraphics Drafting application. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Edit drawings.
Add Views to Drawings.
Modify Preferences.
Create Utility Symbols.
Create Dimensions.
Create Annotations.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-1
Introduction to Drafting
Uses of the Drafting Application The Drafting application can be used to rapidly create drawings of solid parts. Some of the features of the Drafting application are:
Views may be added to the drawing just by indicating their location with the cursor.
As orthographic views are added, they will automatically be aligned with the parent view.
Every view is fully associated with the solid. If the solid is updated, the views will also update.
Drafting annotations (dimensions, labels, and symbols with leaders) are placed directly on the drawing.
Drafting annotations are fully associative to the geometry selected and will update automatically to changes in the solid part.
Fully associative view boundaries automatically calculated when the drawing is updated.
Drawing Display Drawings may be displayed two different ways, full color or monochrome. Full color is the default setting. In this mode objects are displayed in the color that they appear in the modeling application and the background is the color set by the Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Edit Background dialog. Monochrome Display provides a means for a drawing to appear more like an actual drawing (black-on-white). Monochrome is toggle on or off by choosing Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Color Settings and then toggling Monochrome Display. The foreground and background colors may be set in this dialog. Show Widths may also be set here but only applies to drawings. When Monochrome Display is toggled off, drawings will be displayed in full color.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Editing a Drawing The Drawing"Edit option may be chosen to change the creation parameters of a current drawing such as name, size, scale, units of measure, or projection angle.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-3
Introduction to Drafting
The current state of the displayed drawing affects the edit options available. The following are things to be aware of:
The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on the current drawing being modified.
The drawing may be edited to a larger or smaller size. However, if the drawing is edited to a size so small that a view falls entirely outside the boundary of the drawing, an error message will appear.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing In this activity, the current drawing name, size and scale will be modified. Step 1 Open the file pau_edit_1.
Step 2 Choose Drafting. Step 3 Choose Drawing"Open and select 93A12345-5 from the listing as the drawing to open and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-5
Introduction to Drafting
Step 4 Rename the current drawing.
Choose Drawing"Edit.
Change the drawing name in the Selection text field to 93A12345Ć6.
Choose Apply and notice the drawing name update in the graphics area.
Step 5 Change the current drawing size.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-6
Change the values so that Height= 594, Length= 1100.
Choose Apply and notice the drawing size update.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Step 6 Change the current drawing scale.
Enter a new drawing scale in the text fields (1/1) and choose OK.
93A12345–6 (DWG) WORK
Multiple drawing edits may be performed before choosing Apply or OK. Step 7 Choose File"Close"All Parts. NOTE: In order to save the drawing information or edits, the part file must be saved.
Adding a View to a Drawing The first view added is based on the view orientation selected from the list box in the upper portion of the Add View dialog. Once this view is added to the drawing, it determines scale, layer settings, as well as the orthographic space and alignment of subsequent orthographic views. It also establishes the part orientation on the drawing.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-7
Introduction to Drafting
Any modeling view may be used as the first view placed on a drawing.
View direction
ZC YC XC
Choosing Drawing"Add View displays the following dialog.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
View Type Icons
View Creation Steps
Viewpoint Selection List
View Specific Options
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-9
Introduction to Drafting
Create Centerline When toggled ON, this option automatically creates linear, cylindrical, and bolt circle centerlines (with a circular instance set) for views where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view.
Removing Views From a Drawing You can use the Drawing"Remove View option to remove one or more views from a drawing.
Once a view is removed from a drawing, all drafting objects or view modifications associated to that view are deleted.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing In this activity, a view will be added to the drawing previously created. Step 1 Add a view to the drawing.
Choose File→Options→Load Options and select As Saved.
Open the part ***_dwg_1 or open pau_drawing_1_assm and save as ***_drawing_1_assm.
Choose Drafting.
Choose Drawing→Edit; select B" size drawing.
Choose OK.
Choose Add View to Drawing.
The Top viewpoint is the default view orientation. Any one of the listed viewpoints could be imported as the first view on the face of the drawing.
Ensure that the Create Center Line option is toggled On.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-11
Introduction to Drafting
Use the first mouse button to indicate a location near the lower left corner of the drawing as shown.
View View Center View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement
DWG1 (DWG) WORK
If there is a need to reposition the view after placement, choose the Move button from the dialog box, then specify a new view center. Note that the Top viewpoint of the part as it relates to model space is being placed on the drawing such that it depicts an orthographic front view of the part. This flexibility assures that the drawing views necessary to depict the part may be placed on the drawing independent of the orientation of the part in model space. Notice the creation of the centerline. Step 2 Place an orthographic View on the Drawing.
Choose the Orthographic View Icon.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Select the imported view as the parent view.
View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement
Orthographic View Parent View
DWG1 (DWG) WORK
Use the first mouse button to indicate a location above the parent view.
The location of the cursor relative to the base view determines the Orthographic view projection from the parent view. Step 3 Choose File"Save, do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-13
Introduction to Drafting
Setting the View Display Preferences Choosing Preferences"View Display produces the View Display dialog box. The View Display dialog box may be used to define and edit the display of such things as hidden lines, silhouettes, smooth edges, etc..
View Selection Box
View Option Buttons
Button Specific Options
Global View Options
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
The View Display dialog box may be used to preset preferences for subsequent views added to the drawing, or this dialog box may be used to edit the settings of existing drawing views. To edit the View Display preferences of an existing view, select the view(s) from the drawing, or choose the view(s) from the selection box.
Button Specific Options The Button Specific Options area of the dialog box varies to support the different View Option Buttons available. When each View Option Button is selected the appropriate choices for the option are displayed in this area.
View Option Buttons Hidden Lines If the Hidden Line option is toggled Off, Hidden Line removal is not performed and all hidden lines in the view will appear. If the Hidden Line option is toggled On, the color, font and width of the hidden line display is determined by the settings in the Color, Font, and Width option menus.
Hidden Lines=Dashed
Hidden Lines=Invisible
EDS All Rights Reserved
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-15
Introduction to Drafting
Smooth Edges Smooth edges are those edges that their adjacent faces have the same surface tangent at the edge where they meet. If the Smooth Edges option is toggled to the On position, the Color, Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the smooth edges. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. Smooth Edges=On
Smooth Edges=Off
Smooth Edges=Dashed
Visible Lines The appearance of visible objects may be determined by using the Color, Font, and Width option menus.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Virtual Intersections Virtual Intersections are the theoretical sharp intersections that occur where blended faces would intersect, where the display of smooth edges may cause confusion. If the Virtual Intersections option is toggled to the On position, the Color, Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the virtual intersection display. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. Virtual Intersections
Extracted Edges The Extracted Edges option allows the edges of an assembly to be shown without loading all of the component parts. Edges are extracted at the component level and remain associative to the component. Automatic Update The Automatic Update option may be used to control whether a drawing view is updated after the model has been changed. If Automatic Update is turned on, hidden lines, smooth edges, and silhouettes are updated after changes are made to the model. If Automatic Update is toggled off, these edges are not updated. This option does not affect section views, or detail views made from section views. These views always automatically update after the model is changed.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
NOTE: If the Preferences"Drafting"Suppress View Update option is turned On, no automatic update will occur during the return to the Drafting application.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-17
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences In this activity, you will practice setting the view display preferences. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_dwg_1 or ***_drawing_1_assm, whichever is applicable. Step 2 Change the view display preferences for the imported view added to the drawing.
Choose Preferences→View Display.
Select the imported view.
With the Hidden Lines View Option Button depressed, make sure Hidden Line is toggled on.
Set the Hidden Line Font to Dashed.
With the Smooth Edges View Option Button depressed, toggle the Smooth Edges option off.
Choose OK.
Step 3 Save and close the part file.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Creating Utility Symbols The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines, offset center points, target points, and intersection symbols. The utility symbol dialog is activated by choosing Insert→Utility Symbol in the Drafting application. The Utility Symbols dialog box consists of four distinct areas: symbol icons, position options, symbol display parameters and preference options. Symbol Display Parameters control the creation of each utility symbol as it is placed. These parameters may also be used to modify existing drafting symbols.
Symbol Icons
Point Position Options
Symbol Display Parameters
Preference Options
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-19
Introduction to Drafting
Automatic Centerline This option automatically creates centerlines in any existing view(s) where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. If a series of holes in a circle (bolt hole circle) are not a circular instance set, then a linear centerline is created for each hole. The following views are not supported:
Faceted representation view
Unfolded section view
Revolved section view
Associativity of Utility Symbols A utility symbol's placement is controlled by a position on an object. The system will automatically size the symbol components to the objects used to create it, based upon the symbol display parameters.
Deleting a Utility Symbol A utility symbol may be deleted by choosing Edit→Delete and selecting the symbol to delete. The symbols may be selected at any position.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Creating a Cylindrical Centerline A cylindrical centerline that conforms to ASME Y14.5M-1994 standards may be created through points, arcs, or cylindrical faces. The point position options allow a centerline associated to objects other than cylinders to be created. The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines:
A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions.
A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated is moved or reĆsized.
If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is deleted, the centerline will conform to the Retain Annotations setting setting found under Preferences→Drafting.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-21
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline In this activity, cylindrical centerlines will be created using both the arc center and cylindrical face options. Step 1 Open the part pau_symbols_1.
Step 2 Rename the part ***_symbols_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 3 Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-22
Choose Drafting.
Choose Insert→Utility Symbol
Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Select two positions, indicated below, for placement of a single centerline symbol. Repeat for the other two pairs of positions.
Select this pair of edges.
Select this pair of edges.
Select this pair of edges, confirming your selections if needed.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-23
Introduction to Drafting
The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown.
Step 4 Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face option.
Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Place the cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select the face using the first mouse button.
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline, using cursor locations as shown. The indicated end points are projected to the axis of the cylindrical face, and two drafting points are created that are associated to the selected face.
*2
1*
Step 5 Repeat the procedure for the two counterbored holes in the orthographic view. This time, the face selection will need to be confirmed, as the system will select the main, or outside face first. This face will highlight in the view that the face was selected, as well as in the adjacent view.
Toggle Multiple Centerlines to On.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-25
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Introduction to Drafting
Use the numbers from the QuickPick window to select the inner cylindrical face.
Select this face
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline, using cursor locations as shown. 1*
*2
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Make a similar centerline through the lower counterbored hole by selecting the counter bored face shown below.
Select this face
Notice how you did not have to select the endpoints for this centerline, this is because Multiple Centerlines was turned on. The completed centerlines are shown below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 6 Create Automatic Centerlines.
Choose File"Close"Reopen Selected Parts.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-27
Introduction to Drafting
Choose ***_symbols_1.
Choose OK twice.
Dismiss the Information window.
Choose Insert"Utility Symbol.
Choose Automatic Centerline.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the following views from the list: FRONT@16 ORTHO@26 RIGHT@10 SX@25
Choose Apply.
Step 7 Choose File"Save, do not close the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Creating Dimensions The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways. One way is by choosing Insert→Dimension and then selecting the desired dimension. The other way is by choosing the dimension from the customizable Dimension toolbar.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-29
Introduction to Drafting
Dimension Dialog Whenever a dimension type is selected a dimension dialog specific to that type of dimension is displayed.
Name of dimension type
First selection
Second selection
Fold Location
Origin Line and point type definitions for Cylindrical dimensions
Point type Vector definitions for Angular dimensions
Annotation editor for appended text
Local Preferences
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions The Vector Definitions options are only available when creating an angular dimension. An angle dimension is the measurement between two vectors. The various options provide a means of defining the vectors
Existing Line Two Points Extension Line Arc Center Enter Angle Horizontal Right Vertical Up Horizontal Left Vertical Down
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-31
Introduction to Drafting
Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions These options are only available when creating a cylindrical dimension. The various options provide a means of defining the lines or points that the dimension measures.
Existing Line Inferred Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc Center Tangent Point Baseline
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Dimension Local Preferences The Dimensions dialog box contains options that control the display and placement of dimensions. These local preference settings may be changed with each dimension created.
Local Preferences
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-33
Introduction to Drafting
Appended Text Controls Text or symbols may be added to dimensions via the Annotation Editor and toggling on Use Appended Text.
Annotation Editor
To create appended text:
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the desired dimension type.
Choose the Annotation Editor button.
In the annotation editor select the required position button. One or all four positions may be used on the same dimension.
Before
10-34
After
Above
Below
Enter the desired text for the different positions as required and choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
NOTE: If the position arrow displays solid, that is an indicator that text is present and will be displayed in the dimension. If that text is not desired, select the position button and delete the text.
Toggle Use Appended Text on.
Dimension the object.
Any text entered in the appended text fields will continue to be added to any new dimensions created unless the Use Appended Text option is toggled off.
Precision Options The Precision button activates the Dimension Precision dialog box which is used to independently control the precision of both dimension values and tolerance values. Both single (Primary) and dual (Secondary) dimensional precision is supported. If the dimension display format is set to fractional values (instead of decimal values) then the Dimension Precision dialog box will show fractional values for the nominal precision option. This pull down is active when using dual dimensions.
OR
For decimal precision
Example: X.XXX R 2.195
EDS All Rights Reserved
For fractional precision
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Example: X.X R 2.2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-35
Introduction to Drafting
Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options The display of tolerance values may be controlled using the Tolerance Types shown below.
Click here Bilateral Unilateral+ UnilateralBilateral No tolerance +Limit, 2 Lines Tolerance Types
-Limit, 2 Lines +Limit, 1 Line -Limit, 1 Line Basic Reference Diameter Reference Not to Scale
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Tolerance Value Options The Tolerance Value fields are active in respect to the units button, Inches or Millimeters, that has been selected. The units buttons are active depending on the dual dimension format that has been selected by Preferences→Annotation→Units. Use the Tolerance Value fields to enter upper and lower tolerance values for both Inch and SI units. Any value entered in these fields will be interpreted as positive unless a negative (-) value is specified.
Tolerance Values
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-37
Introduction to Drafting
Some examples of different tolerance values and displays are shown below. nominal size= 5.50 inches upper tolerance = .030 lower tolerance = -.010 Equal Bilateral Only the upper tolerance value is used; the lower value is ignored. 5.50 ".03
nominal size= 5.50 inches upper tolerance = .030 lower tolerance = -.010 Unilateral -
5.50 ) .00 * .01
The negative limit below (-TOL) will show value while the positive limit above (+.000) will be zero.
nominal size = 5.50 inches upper tolerance = .030 lower tolerance = -.010 + Limit 1 Line
5.53 – 5.49
Limits are calculated by adding the positive tolerance value to the dimension value for the upper limit of your dimension, and subtracting the negative value for the lower limit
Basic
5.50
Displays a basic dimension enclosed in a rectangular box around the dimension. No tolerance values are displayed.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Placement Options Dimensions placement on the drawing may be controlled using the options shown below.
Auto Placement
Manual Placement, Arrows In Manual Placement, Arrows Out
Auto placement automatically centers the dimension between the extension lines if space allows, or moves the text outside the extension lines if necessary. Auto placement also controls whether the leader lines come from left or right. When using the Manual Placement, Arrows In or Arrows Out options, the dimension is placed at the cursor location specified. The leader line placement is controlled manually using the Leader From option.
Initial Position
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Final Position
Cursor Movement cursor position
cross hairs
Cursor Movement
Initial Position
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
In Auto" placement, the cursor is insensitive to the horizontal direction
Final Position
cursor position
In Manual" placement the cursor is sensitive to cursor position
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-39
Introduction to Drafting
Arrow Line and Extension Line Options The display of arrow lines and extension lines for dimensions may be controlled using the Arrow Line Display and Extension Line Display options shown below. Display Arrow on Side 1
Display Arrow on Side 2 Display Extension Line on Side 2
Display Extension Line on Side 1
Example: 2 Arrows & 2 Extension Lines 8.0000 Example: Arrow 1 & Extension 2 8.0000
NOTE: Side 1 refers to the first object selected and Side 2 refers to the second object selected.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-40
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Leader Direction Options The dimension leader direction may be controlled by selecting one of the three leader options. The leader option may be set prior to creating the dimension or changed during placement of the dimension.
Example: Left
R 2.000
Infer From Left
Example: Right
R 2.000
From Right
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-41
Introduction to Drafting
Text Justification Options Text justification may be controlled using the Horizontal and Vertical Justification options. These are used when there is more than one line of dimension text and/or symbols, such as appended text or GD&T symbols. Vertical Justification Options
Horizontal Justification Options
6.000 12 Places 6.000 12 Places 6.000 12 Places
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Left/Top Justification
Center/Middle Justification
Right/Bottom Justification
The origin of the dimension may be changed simply by selecting it and dragging to the new position. The dimension will drag within the constraints that it was created, i.e. if Automatic Placement was used during creation, the dimension will remain centered between the arrows.
10-42
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
In addition to the Dimension Local Preferences, there are Global Preferences governing drafting views and entities. These are the Preferences found in the Preferences pullĆdown menu shown below.
Global Drafting Preferences
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-43
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions In this activity, several dimensions will be created using various local settings on the Dimensions dialog. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. Step 2 Set the work layer to 111 (category DIMS).
Choose Format→Layer Settings.
Choose layer 111.
Choose Make Work and OK.
NOTE: It will be necessary to set Dimension local preference settings and the Global preferences to create each of the following dimensions. Step 3 Create a Horizontal dimension.
Choose Preferences→Annotation→Lettering. Set the Lettering Types option menu to Dimension, and the Character Size to .25. Choose OK.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Horizontal.
In the Horizontal dialog window choose the Annotation Editor icon.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-44
Choose the Appended Text Below icon.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Enter 6 EQ SPACES in text field and choose OK.
Notice that Use Appended Text was automatically toggled on.
Set the Precision for 2 decimal places.
Set the alignment methods to Center and Middle.
Set the Placement option menu to Auto Placement.
Select the two centerlines as shown in the figure below.
Select a cursor location to place the dimension on the drawing.
Notice the extension lines are spaced from the linear centerlines, not the arc centers.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Create a Vertical dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Vertical.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-45
Introduction to Drafting
Toggle Use Appended Text off.
Set the tolerance type to Equal Bilateral Tolerance.
Accept the default value in the Upper Tolerance field (.005).
Set the Precision to 3 decimal places.
Select the objects shown below.
Place the dimension on the drawing.
Step 5 Create a Cylindrical dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Cylindrical.
Set the Precision to 1 decimal place.
Set the tolerance type to No Tolerance.
Select the outer edges of the cylinder to dimension as shown below. Select this edge
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this edge
10-46
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Place the dimension on the drawing.
Step 6 Create a Radius NOT to Center dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Radius.
Set the Precision to 2 decimal places.
Set the Placement Option to Manual Placement, Arrows Out.
Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below.
Step 7 Create a Hole dimension.
Choose Insert"Dimension"Hole.
Set the Precision to 3 decimal places.
Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 8 Choose File"Save, do not close the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-47
Introduction to Drafting
Annotation Editor The Annotation Editor is used to place other information on the drawing such as notes, labels, GD&T symbols, and User Defined Symbols. Any of these symbols can be placed on the drawing with a leader or as a standalone note without a leader.
Tool Bar
Text Entry Window
Preview Window
Symbol Display and Text Preference Options
Placement Options
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-48
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
As text and symbols are entered, the text and control characters appear within the Text Entry Window. In this window the formatting options available within the Tool Bar may be used to customize the appearance of the text. The preview window displays the text as it will appear when it is placed on the drawing.
The Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains several buttons that allow various text formatting operations to be performed. Insert from File
Save As
Delete Text Attribute
Paste
Cut
Bold
Font
Character Scale Factor
TIP
Copy
Clear
Preview
Select Next Symbol
Underline
Italic
Superscript
Overline
Reset Text and Dialog Preferences
Fit to Preview Window
Text Justification
Subscript
To reveal the function of any button, hold the cursor over the icon until the name of the button appears.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-49
Introduction to Drafting
Placing the Text Notes and labels may be placed on the drawing either with or without a leader line, depending on the placement option chosen.
Create without Leader
Create with Leader
Creating text Without a Leader When the Create without Leader option is selected, the Origin Tool dialog box is displayed. This dialog box allows you to specify the placement and alignment method for the text.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-50
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Creating Text with a Leader To create text with a leader line, choose the button to display the Create Leader dialog box. This dialog box allows one or more leaders to be specified as well as the display characteristics of each leader.
Plain Plain with All Around Symbol Plain with Aligned Arrow Plain with Aligned Arrow and All Around Symbol Extension Line ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature
Datum on Annotation
Text Alignment Options Top
Datum on Stub
Options Available For ASME Y14.5M-1994 ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Standards Datum Feature On Dimension
ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature With Extension Line
Middle Bottom Below Bottom, Extend to maximum Below Bottom, Extend to maximum, Underline Below Bottom Below Bottom, Underline Below Top, Extend to maximum Below Top, Extend to maximum, Underline
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Below Top Below Top, Underline
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-51
Introduction to Drafting
To create a leader, simply select the reference geometry for the leader end point, indicate up to seven intermediate leader points (if necessary), select the preferred leader type, leader side placement, and leader/text alignment. Once all selections are made for the Create Leader dialog box, choosing OK will proceed to the Place Annotation dialog box discussed earlier. Drafting objects may be created with more than one leader by selecting the New Leader button anytime during the leader creation process. The default placement method is Drag, but the Point Constructor option may be used to tie the text location to a control point, arc center, or intersection point. Text may also be aligned either horizontally or vertically with an existing drafting object using the Align Text option. The Offset Distance option may be used to indicate an origin position offset from an existing drafting object. A horizontal and vertical distance is given as multiples of the current character size when using the Offset Character option.
Editing Text Text may be edited in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the drawing. When a note or label is selected, it is captured in the Text Entry Window so that changes may be made. When editing is completed, simply choose the Apply button to accept and display the changes on the drawing.
Editing Existing Dimension Preferences The Annotation Preferences of existing dimensions may be edited simply by doubleĆclicking on the dimension. The Annotation Preferences dialog will appear and the following types of preferences may be edited.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-52
Dimension
Line/Arrow
Lettering
Units
Radial
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor In this activity, the Annotation Editor will be used to create a label. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. Step 2 Make layer 101 the Work Layer.
In the Utility tool bar, key in 101 for the work layer.
Step 3 Create the Label Shown to define the chamfer.
Choose Insert→Annotation.
Ensure that Drafting Symbols is selected.
Enter the text, as shown in the illustration above, in the text entry area using the appropriate degree symbol.
Choose the Text Justification button from the Control Character Area.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-53
Introduction to Drafting
Choose Left Justify.
Left Justify Center Justify Right Justify
Choose the Create with Leader option.
Select the edge shown to place the arrow leader. Select this edge
Choose OK to indicate that no intermediate points are required.
Locate the Label in the proper location.
Step 4 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-54
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Introduction to Drafting
SUMMARY
The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings. Views and dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model and update when changes are made to the model. In this lesson you:
Modified a drawing.
Added views to a drawing.
Created Utility Symbols.
Created Cylindrical Centerlines.
Created Dimensions.
Added annotation to a drawing.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
10-55
Introduction to Drafting
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-56
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features Lesson 11
PURPOSE
This lesson will define datum plane reference features.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a Datum Plane.
Create a hole feature on a tangent datum plane.
Move a hole feature location by changing a datum plane angle.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-1
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ Reference Features ÏÏÏ 11 Reference features are construction tools that assist in the creation of features ÏÏÏ sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not ÏÏÏ and exist, or as associative linear objects. Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size, but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model. Reference Features may be created relative to an existing solid model or fixed in model space. This lesson will only discuss relative datum planes.
In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the outside of the cylinder, construction tools are necessary. These tools are needed because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather than the cylindrical face of the base solid. The amount of control desired over placement of a feature sometimes dictates the number of reference features required. Two examples below show a hole in the side of a cylinder, normal to the axis of the cylinder. The example on the right requires an additional datum plane to position the hole perpendicular to the slot. Plane 3B
Plane 1A
Plane 2A
parameter
Plane 2B
Example A
Plane 1B
Example B
In example A above, Plane 1A defines a position through the cylinder axis, while Plane 2A defines a placement plane that is tangent to the cylindrical face and perpendicular to Plane 1A. This allows the hole to be placed on the tangent datum and be relative to both the cylinder and Plane 1A. Datum Plane reference features are accessible by choosing Insert"Form Feature"Datum Plane from the menu bar while in the Modeling application.
11-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Datum Plane The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that may be used:
To define a sketch plane.
To act as the planar placement face for the creation of form features (ie: hole, slot, pad, boss, pocket, etc.).
As a target edge for positioning features.
As a horizontal or vertical reference.
For the mirror plane in Mirror Body and Mirror Feature.
To act as the 'trim to' face (extruded and revolved bodies).
To trim a body.
In assemblies, as mating TO or FROM object.
In Drafting, as a hinge line for a section or auxiliary view.
To help define a relative Datum Axis.
Relative Datum Planes Relative datum planes are constrained (associated) to other geometric objects. A constraint is a restriction on a datum that positions it relative to some existing plane, face, or feature. Many constraint combinations can be used to create relative datum planes.
Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection Relative datum planes are created by selecting an existing object. The constraint type is determined (inferred) by the objects selected. Generally, whatever is necessary to describe the relationship of the plane to other objects determines the constraint type(s) to be used. One, two, or three constraints may be necessary. Simply selecting the objects will present the applicable constraint types.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
A Single Constraint associates the datum plane to the target solid using either one of the following creation methods:
Offset From Face or Datum Plane (Select a face or Datum Plane)
Through Face Axis (Select cylinder, cone or revolved feature)
Using Dual Constraints means that the constraints must be specified in pairs to create the datum plane. The possible combinations of selections are shown on the next page. The Triple Constraint method is inferred by selecting three points on a single solid body. The Datum Plane is associative to the body and constrained to the selected points. Only Endpoints and Midpoints on linear edges are selectable.
Datum Plane User Interface Most of the datum planes created in this course can be created with the Static Datum Plane Dynamic Input Field by inferred methods.
The Datum Plane Dialog may be used to create datum planes that are more specific than those you can create with the Inferred method.
11-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Dual Constraints First Constraint (selection)
Second Constraint (selection)
Offset From Face
Offset From Face (Center Plane)
Through Point
Through Edge
Through Datum Axis
Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis
Angle to Face/Datum Plane Angle is 0 Angle is 0 or 90
Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Parallel to Face/Datum Plane Tangent to Face Tangent/Normal/Binormal to a Curve/Edge Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Normal to Edge Normal to Datum Axis Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Point Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Tangent to Face
Tangent to Face
Through Point Angle to Face/Datum Plane (Angle is 0, 0 90) Tangent to Face
Through Curve
Through Point
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-5
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Types The following is a list of the datum planes that will be covered in this lesson:
Offset
Center
Angle
Tangent
Through Control Points
Point and Direction
Offset Datum Plane To create an offset datum plane
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the face to offset from.
Do one of the following:
Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero).
Key in a value, press Enter, and choose OK.
Select the base of the normal, drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK.
11-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Center Datum Plane To create a center datum plane
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select two parallel faces or datum planes.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-7
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis To create a datum plane through a cylindrical axis:
11-8
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis To create a datum plane at an angle through a cylindrical axis, an additional datum plane must be created.
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Choose OK.
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Select the previously created datum plane.
Do one of the following:
Choose OK to accept the default value of 90.
Key in a value, press Enter, and choose OK.
Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-9
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge To create a datum plane at an angle through an edge, do the following:
11-10
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the edge that the datum plane is to pass through.
Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.
Do one of the following:
Key in a value, press Enter, and choose OK.
Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired angle and choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 To create a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face, an additional datum plane ÏÏÏ must be created. ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Choose OK.
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis).
Select the previously created datum plane.
Choose Alternate Solution from the Datum Plane toolbar until the correct tangent datum plane is previewed.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-11
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Through Three Points To create a datum plane through 3 points, do the following:
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).
Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.
Choose OK.
NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.
11-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction To create a datum plane defined by a point and direction, do the following:
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Choose Datum Plane from the Datum Plane toolbar.
Choose Point & Direction.
Select a point through which the datum plane should pass.
Define the normal of the datum plane using Inferred Vector or Vector Constructor.
Choose OK twice.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-13
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes ÏÏÏ In this activity, three relative datum planes will be created. The datum planes 11 created are shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum plane 1 Datum plane 2
Datum plane 3
Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_1.
Step 2 Choose Modeling. Step 3 Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above the upper face of the block.
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the top face of the block and confirm the selection if necessary. Pick this top face.
11-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
The top face highlights and a direction vector points normal to the face, in this case, the positive ZC direction. The vector displays the positive offset direction.
Key in 1 and press Enter.
Choose OK. Datum plane
Datum planes have infinite bounds even though they are displayed with visible boundaries. Step 4 Create a second datum plane through three points. The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the block.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-15
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the first point and confirm any of the edges. Any of the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.
First Point
Third Point Second Point
Carefully select each of the two midpoints.
Choose OK.
The datum plane is created and positioned through the three selected points. The relationship of this datum plane through the points will remain if the block parameters are changed.
Step 5 Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right faces.
11-16
Choose Datum Plane.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the right planar face.
Right Face
Select the left planar face.
Left Face
Choose OK.
The datum plane is created and located at the center of the part and is parallel to the faces selected.
Step 6 Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the datum planes to the block.
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-17
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select BLOCK(6) and choose OK.
Choose Feature Dialog.
Change the Block Dimensions values to:
X Length =
2
Y Length =
2
Z Length =
5
Choose OK.
The revised values are displayed in the graphics area. Again a dialog box displays options to edit the feature. The feature may still be modified without updating the model.
Choose OK in the dialog box.
If there were more features that needed to be edited, those features could be selected at this time. In this case, there are no more edits desired.
11-18
Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog box to complete the change.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Notice that the constraints applied to the datum planes at the time of creation ÏÏÏ continue to control the positioning of the datum planes after the block is edited. ÏÏÏ
Fit the view.
Step 7 Close the part, do not save.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-19
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Selecting and Using Datums Selecting Datum Planes - When selecting a datum plane in the graphics area, one of its displayed boundaries must be selected. Creating Features using Datum Planes - Form Features created using datum planes for the planar placement face are created normal to the datum plane. These features are positioned in the center of the datum plane as a default if no positioning dimensions are specified. When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face, the system will display a direction vector showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature will be created. The side shown can be accepted by selecting the Accept Default Side option. If it is desired that the feature be created in the opposite direction of the default vector, the Flip the Default Side option must be selected.
Editing Datum Planes Datum planes may be edited three different ways:
Select the datum plane, and with the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters.
DoubleĆclick on a datum plane.
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters and select the datum plane.
Deleting Datum Planes
11-20
Use Edit→ Feature→Delete
Select the datum plane. With the cursor over the selection click MB3 and choose Delete from the popĆup menu.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes This activity will demonstrate the creation of relative datum planes as they apply to a cylindrical face. Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_2. Step 2 Save the part as ***_ref_2 where *** represent your initials.
A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of the part, centered in the feature. Relative reference features are required to accomplish this task.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-21
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Start the Modeling Application.
Step 4 Choose Datum Plane. Step 5 Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis, at an angle to the existing plane of 90 degrees.
Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part. Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Select the existing Datum Plane.
Choose OK
to accept the default value of 90.
Step 6 Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same cylindrical face to use as a placement face for the hole feature.
11-22
Choose Datum Plane.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Select the original Datum Plane.
Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part.
Choose Alternate Solution until the new tangent datum plane is in the orientation shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 7 Create a center datum plane.
Choose Datum Plane.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-23
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the two faces shaded below.
Choose OK.
Step 8 Create a hole feature.
11-24
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple.
Specify a diameter of 10.
Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face.
Ensure that the direction arrow is pointing into the part.
Choose the cylindrical face of the hole through the center of the bottom of the part as the thru face.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Location Datum Placement Datum
Thru Face
Location Datum
Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered on the two datum planes shown above.
Step 9 Move the datum planes to another layer.
Choose Format"Move to Layer.
Select all the datum planes.
Choose OK.
Key in 62 and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-25
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due to its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained to the solid body.
Step 10 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
11-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane In this activity, a relative datum plane will be created, which is to be used as a placement plane for a hole at an angle to, and through a block. Design Intent Create a simple hole that will have its angle parametrically controlled.
Step 1 Choose File"Recently Opened Parts and select the part pau_ref_1. Recently Opened Parts allows switching back and forth between parts opened recently, in the current Unigraphics session or previous sessions. The Recently Opened Parts list may contain up to ten parts. Step 2 Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to a face/plane.
Choose Modeling.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-27
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the right edge (not the mid point) and confirm the selection if necessary. Edge
Select the top face, and confirm the selection if necessary. Face
In the Angle Dynamic Input Field, key in 20 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
A datum plane is created at a 20 degree angle from the top of the block and passes through the selected edge.
11-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
Step 3 Create the hole perpendicular to the datum plane. Now a Simple Thru Hole will be created using the datum plane. The hole will be normal to the datum plane, but will pass through the block at an angle because the datum plane is angled to the block.
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in .5 for the diameter.
Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for the placement face.
Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face.
Bottom Face
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-29
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Features are initially positioned in the center of the datum plane. If no other positioning dimensions are specified, the hole will stay in this position. In this case the hole will be positioned to the front and right edge of the model.
The Perpendicular icon dimension.
is already selected for the first positioning
Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.
Select Edge
11-30
Key in -.75 as the positional expression value.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.
Select edge
Accept the value of 2.0 by choosing OK.
The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location.
Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane.
Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-31
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Try 80 and 90 degrees. Can you explain the results?
Step 5 Close the part, do not save.
11-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ In this activity, you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and 11 ÏÏÏ Direction option. The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner of a block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity. ÏÏÏ
Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner
Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_mm and save it as ***_hole_corners, where *** represent your initials.
Step 2 Choose Modeling. Step 3 Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1. Step 4 Change the work layer to layer 61. Step 5
Create a datum plane with the point and direction method.
Choose Datum Plane.
Choose Datum Plane Dialog from the toolbar.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-33
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Point and Direction.
Select the end point as shown to define a point on the datum plane.
Select this end point.
11-34
Change the Inferred Vector to Vector Constructor.
Set the Vector Method to Two Points.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the end points shown below.
Select this end point.
Select this end point.
Choose OK twice.
Step 6 Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane, through the block.
Choose Hole.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in a diameter value of 25.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-35
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the datum plane as the placement face.
Thru Face
Placement Face
If the hole is not going into the block, choose Reverse Side.
Select the far side of the block as the thru face and choose OK.
Choose Point onto Point as the positioning dimension.
Point to Point
11-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the end point as shown.
Select this end point
Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible.
Step 7 Modify the size of the block.
Select the block.
With the cursor on the block, click MB3.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-37
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Edit Parameters.
Click on p2=100.000.
Key in 400.
Choose OK twice.
Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.
Step 8 Save and close the part.
11-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SUMMARY
Datum planes are reference features that are used as construction tools to assist in the creation of features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not exist. Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size, but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model. In this lesson you:
Created associative datum planes.
Created a hole feature from an associative datum plane.
Created an associative datum plane by defining a point and direction.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
11-39
Datum Plane Reference Features
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
11-40
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis Reference Feature Lesson 12
PURPOSE datum axis.
This lesson will define another type of reference feature, the
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a Datum Axis.
Locate a hole feature using a datum axis.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-1
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis This option allows a linear reference feature to be created that may be used as a(n):
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
12-2
Axis of rotation for revolved features.
Axis of rotation for circular arrays.
Pivot axis for datum planes.
Directional reference.
Dimensional reference for feature position.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
User Interface When you first open the Datum Axis option, the Datum Axis static toolbar displays in the upper left corner of the graphics window. The static toolbar uses the Inferred method to let you quickly create a datum axis based on your object and constraint selections.
The main Datum Axis dialog is used to create datum axes that are more complex than those you can create with the Inferred method. To open the main Datum Axis dialog, click its icon
on the Datum Axis Static toolbar.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-3
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Relative Datum Axis The four relative datum axis methods that will be covered in this lesson are:
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Through Two Points
Through Edge
Through Cylindrical, Conical or Revolved Face Axis
Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
The important function of these Reference Features is that they are associative to existing geometry.
12-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis Through Two Points To create a datum axis through 2 points, do the following:
Choose the Datum Axis icon.
Select the control points as desired (edges or curves).
Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-5
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve To create a datum axis through an edge or curve, do the following:
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
12-6
Choose the Datum Axis icon.
Select the edge or curve.
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face, do the following:
Choose the Datum Axis icon.
Select the face.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-7
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces, do the following:
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Datum Axis icon.
Select the faces.
Choose OK.
TIP
12-8
There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of two faces/planes from the datum plane dialog box. This requires creation of an associative linear reference feature (datum axis) at the desired intersection to serve as the pivot position. A datum plane may then be created through the axis using whatever other constraint that applies.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Editing Datum Axes To edit datum axes parameters, use any of the following methods:
Select a datum axis, and with the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters.
Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window.
Use Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Deleting Datum Axes
Use Edit→ Feature→Delete
Select a datum axis. With the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and choose Delete.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-9
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums In this activity, a datum axis and datum planes will be added to constrain the pivot location of a hole feature. Design Intent A 0.5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. The origin of the hole will be on the top face and located from the right face. The hole is to remain centered in the block along the YC axis. The angle of the hole shall be editable in a plane parallel to the front face.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ZC YC XC
A/2 A
Step 1 Open the part file.
Choose File→Recently Opened Parts. Select pau_ref_1.
Choose Modeling.
Step 2 Create the Reference Features.
12-10
Change the work layer to 61.
Choose Datum Plane.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Select the right face on the block as shown.
ZC YC XC
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Right Face
In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in -2 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the back face of the block as shown and confirm. Back Face
ZC YC XC
Front Face
Select the front face of the block as shown and confirm.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-11
Datum Axis Reference Feature
A center datum plane is created.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Datum Axis.
Select the top face as shown below.
Select the datum plane as shown below.
Top Face
ZC YC XC
Datum Plane
Choose OK.
A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the block and the associative datum plane.
12-12
Choose Datum Plane.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Select the right face of the block as shown.
ZC YC XC
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Right Face
Select the Datum Axis.
In the Angle Dynamic Input Field key in 45 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-13
Datum Axis Reference Feature
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the newly created datum plane.
In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in 1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Fit the view.
Step 3 Create a Thru Hole.
12-14
Choose Hole.
Choose the Simple icon.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Enter .5 for the Diameter.
Select the edge of the datum plane as shown.
The tool solid for the hole appears in the display.
Datum Plane
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ZC YC XC
Bottom Face
Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face, confirm and choose OK.
Choose Point onto Line.
Select the datum axis as the target edge.
A positioning dimension appears in the graphics area with a value of 0.
Choose the Point onto Line.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-15
Datum Axis Reference Feature
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the center datum plane as shown and choose OK.
ZC YC XC
Select this Datum Plane
The hole is located. The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay centered in the block.
12-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ZC YC XC
Change the angle from 45 degrees to 20 degrees.
Choose OK.
The angle of the hole changes, but the point of entry remains the same.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-17
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Step 5 Change the Location of the Datum Axis.
DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below.
Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK.
ZC YC XC
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ZC YC XC
Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save the part file.
12-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes This activity will demonstrate the difference in positional associativity between Point Direction and Datum Axis when either is used to define the rotation axis of an instance array. Step 1 Open the part pau_datumaxis_1 and start the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Investigate the model.
Use the third mouse button popĆup menu to change the Display Mode to Wireframe.
Choose Format"Layer Settings and make the display of ALL layers Selectable.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-19
Datum Axis Reference Feature
The model contains two identical hole patterns. The central hole in each pattern is located associatively to the relative datum planes in the part. The hole pattern on the left in the graphic was created by specifying a point in space and a vector to revolve the pattern about. The pattern on the right was created by specifying the relative datum axis to revolve the pattern about.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Modify the model.
12-20
Choose Edit"Feature"Parameters from the main menu bar.
Select the BLOCK(0) feature and choose OK.
Choose the Feature Dialog button.
Change the X Length to 5 and press Tab.
Change the Y Length to 10 and choose OK.
Choose OK to dismiss the feature Edit Parameters dialog box.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
Choose OK to update the model.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole pattern on the left does not update as expected. This is due to this hole pattern being created with a nonĆassociative reference point and direction vector.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-21
Datum Axis Reference Feature
The left hole pattern maintained its relationship to the objects used to define it, but the nonĆassociative specified point in space does not change. The hole pattern on the right that depends on the relative datum axis to define the rotation point and vector updates as expected.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save the part file.
12-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Datum Axis Reference Feature
SUMMARY
A Datum Axis is a linear reference feature that is used as an aid in the construction of other features.
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
In this lesson you:
Created a Datum Axis.
Positioned features using a Datum Axis.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
12-23
Datum Axis Reference Feature
ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
12-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketching Lesson 13
PURPOSE
OBJECTIVES
To introduce the method of creating a sketch and free hand sketching of curves.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a sketch.
Create sketch curves.
Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.
Apply geometric constraints to sketches.
Identify constraints.
Convert a sketch curve to reference.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-1
Sketching
What is a sketch? A sketch is a feature that is intended to contain a collection of two dimensional curves. Using a set of rules applied by the user, a sketch parametrically controls the two dimensional profile. These rules, called constraints, constitute the essence of constraint based modeling, a very powerful portion of Unigraphics solid modeling. Profiles may be used to produce extruded or revolved features, or to define sections for free form features such as a swept feature or a through curves lofted surface. A profile may contain some, all, or none of the constraints required to fully capture the design intent. Dimensional and geometric constraints may be used to establish a design intent as well as provide the ability to perform parameter driven changes. Geometric relations may be established between the curves within a profile as well as with curves in other profiles and model geometry such as edges or datums.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Why sketch? Sketched profiles possess a higher level of control over features, thus automating the propagation of changes. The most obvious reason for sketching is when a design intent is well known and constraints can be quickly applied to capture that intent. Another reason is when there is a need to iterate through a number of various solutions to validate a certain design intent. Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane, it will automatically move when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Since sketches do not require constraining, this approach is the quickest way to build features and still have a sufficient level of associativity. The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that, as rules are applied, the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the assigned rule has on the geometry. This gives the user the ability to quickly change profiles of features created using sketch curves.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-3
Sketching
When should a sketch be used? Unigraphics users should sketch whenever they have a need for parametrically controlled curves. Most features of solid models can be created using combinations of form features. The Unigraphics sketcher gives the user the ability to sketch shapes that are not available as standard form features. This could be accomplished with explicit curves, but there would be no parametric control over the shape. The user might also consider sketching when a combination of features used to create the desired shape makes the shape difficult to edit.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size from part to part, a sketch as part of a user defined feature should be considered.
Sketches may be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself to extruded or revolved geometry.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-5
Sketching
Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. Consider them for guide paths for swept features, or as section curves for free form features.
The added advantage of being able to quickly and easily change the geometry based on rules that the designer applies should be a large part of the determination of when to sketch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
An important aspect of modeling that helps the user decide when to use a sketch is defining the design intent of the model. The design intent consists of two items:
Design Considerations - The geometric requirements on the actual part, including engineering and design rules that determine the detail configuration of the part.
Potential Areas for Change - Known design changes or iterations, and their effects on the part configuration.
As a general rule, the more design considerations and potential areas for change, the more likely there are benefits from sketching.
13-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketches and the Model Navigator Since sketches are features of the solid model, they are listed in the Model Navigator and any edits supported by the Model Navigator that are germane to sketches are available.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-7
Sketching
Sketches and Layers Organizing part files is a very important part of modeling. The sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating layer control as sketches are activated and deactivated. This automated layer management is designed to ensure that the user does not accidentally construct objects in the active sketch across multiple layers. Unigraphics assigns the current work layer at creation to the sketch. As the user subsequently activates the sketch, the work layer is set to the layer assigned to the sketch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Creating a New Sketch Choosing the Sketch icon
starts the sketch function.
The Sketch Plane The first thing that needs to be defined is the plane that the sketch curves will be placed on. But, before this can be done you must consider the state of the model. Since our goal is to develop a parametric model, all of the features need to be associative. Is the sketch going to define the base feature or has a base feature already been created? The tool bar shown below is used to define the sketch plane. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Sketch Plane
5 Datum Plane
2 XC-YC Plane
6 Datum CSYS
3 YC-ZC Plane
7 OK
4 XC-ZC Plane
8 Cancel
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketch to Define the Base Feature If the sketch is going to define the base feature then you may define the plane of the sketch by choosing one of the following:
XC-YC Plane
ZC-YC Plane
ZC-XC Plane
Datum CSYS
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-9
Sketching
After the plane is chosen the plane is highlighted in the graphic window. You to accept and enter the sketcher function. The sketch then chose OK plane is then oriented normal to the graphics screen.
Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature If a base feature already exists, then you will define the sketch plane on a planar face or a datum plane of the base feature. The datum plane may already exist or may be created on the fly. If you are choosing a face or an existing datum plane:
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Sketch Plane icon.
Select the face or datum plane.
Define the horizontal or vertical reference
Choose OK.
If you are defining a datum plane on the fly:
13-10
Choose the Datum Plane icon
Select the required objects to define the datum plane.
Choose OK.
Define the horizontal or vertical reference
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Defining the Reference Direction The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the sketch plane. There are times when no linear object is pointing in the desired horizontal direction. At these times a vertical reference may be defined, because vertical is by definition ninety degrees from horizontal; the system is able to interpret where the desired horizontal direction is when using a vertical reference.
Desired Horizontal Direction
YC ZC
Vertical Reference
XC
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Resultant Sketch Orientation
Planar Placement Face
The direction of an axis may be changed as follows:
To flip the direction of an axis, doubleĆclick on it.
To specify a new direction, select the axis to redirect then select a straight edge. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define the new direction.
In addition, the normal of the sketch plane may be changed by doubleĆclicking on the ZC axis. This only applies when the sketch plane is being defined by a datum plane.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-11
Sketching
Naming a Sketch The system requires a unique name for each sketch, and therefore will select the next available sketch name in the queue as the default. The system default from Unigraphics is SKETCH_###" where the pound signs are replaced by the next available number counting up from 000 (SKETCH_000, SKETCH_001, etc.). A sketch name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking on the default sketch name and then typing in the new name.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The sketch can also be renamed by:
Choosing Task→Sketch Properties
Using the Model Navigator
TIP
13-12
It is highly recommended that sketches be named in a descriptive manner rather than accepting the default. This allows downstream users to understand the function of the sketch at a glance.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The Active Sketch In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features at different orientations. When using the sketcher, only one sketch may be worked on at a time. This sketch is called the active sketch. Curves created while a sketch is active become associated with the active sketch. When returning to a sketch to add to or modify a profile, the sketch must be activated. There are three ways to activate a sketch:
DoubleĆclicking on a sketch curve.
In the Model Navigator doubleĆclick on the sketch feature node.
Select the Sketch icon and from the Sketch Name pullĆdown, select the desired sketch.
There are two ways to deactivate an active sketch as follows:
Select the Finish icon.
Choose Task→Finish.
EDS All Rights Reserved
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-13
Sketching
Sketch Creation Steps Sketch for a Base Feature
Set the work layer for the sketch.
Choose the Sketch icon.
Define the sketch plane by one of the following.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
XC-YC Plane
ZC-YC Plane
ZC-XC Plane
Datum CSYS
Name the sketch. Choose OK.
Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane
Choose the Sketch icon.
Choose the Sketch Plane icon.
Select the face or datum plane.
Define the horizontal or vertical reference
13-14
Name the sketch. Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 1 - Sketch Creation In this activity you will practice the creation of a sketch for a base feature, a sketch that is to be defined on an existing face and a sketch where the datum plane is created on the fly. Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and start the modeling application. Step 2 Create a sketch for a base feature.
Make layer 21 the work layer.
Choose Sketch.
Choose the YC-ZC Plane.
Click on the sketch name, key in base and press Enter.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The sketch is created. Unigraphics created a fixed Datum Plane on the specified sketch plane and two fixed Datum Axes along its major axes to support the new sketch. Notice the WCS. The system has manipulated it so that XC is parallel to the horizontal direction and YC is vertical.
Choose Finish.
Step 3 Close the part do not save. Step 4 Open pau_skt_creation and start the modeling application. Step 5 Create a sketch on an existing face.
Make layer 21 the work layer.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-15
Sketching
Choose Sketch.
The Sketch Plane
icon is already selected. Select the Face shown below.
Select this face.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Horizontal Reference
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted).
Select the horizontal reference at the location shown above.
Click on the sketch name, key in skt1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Step 6 Create a curve on the sketch plane.
13-16
Choose Line.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create the line as shown below.
Click here . . .
then
Click here.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane.
Choose Tools"Expression.
Select the expression, Change_Me=1, and change the value to 3.5.
Choose OK.
Rotate the part and notice how the line remained associative to the face.
Step 8 Create a sketch on a datum plane.
Replace the view with the TFRĆTRI view.
Make layer 22 the work layer, layer 21 invisible, and layer 1 selectable.
Choose Sketch.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-17
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Datum Plane.
Select the 2 shaded faces shown below.
Choose OK.
A center datum plane is created.
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted).
13-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the horizontal reference at the location shown below.
Horizontal Reference
Click on the sketch name, key in skt2 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Choose Finish.
EDS All Rights Reserved
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-19
Sketching
Step 9 Activate existing sketches. This step will demonstrate 2 ways of activating existing sketches.
Make layer 21 selectable.
DoubleĆclick on the sketch curve (1) shown below. 1
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fit the view (MB3).
Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.
13-20
Choose Finish.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Sketch.
Choose SKT2 from the sketch name pullĆdown.
Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Finish.
Step 10 Close the part, do not save.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-21
Sketching
Sketch Curve Creation Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve tool bar. As curves are created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer Constraint Settings.
Sketch Curve Tool Bar Profile
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Line
Arc
Circle
Infer Constraints Setting Dialog Vertical
Perpendicular
Midpoint
Tangent
Horizontal
Parallel
Coincident
Collinear
Point on Curve
Equal Radius
Point on String
Concentric
Equal Length
As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to represent the constraint that will be applied, if any.
13-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Locking a Constraint When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that constraint by pressing MB2. For example, you are creating a line and the parallel symbol appears, you press MB2. Now as you move the cursor, the new line that is rubber banding, is doing so parallel to the reference curve.
Snap Angle The snap angle is a global preference set in the Sketch Preferences dialog box that is applied any time curves are being created. It is used to snap" a line to horizontal or vertical. When creating lines outside of the sketcher, snap angle is only applied when using inferred cursor location. The default snap angle is set to 3° and is user definable between 0° and 20°. This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or vertical from the first specified location, effectively creating a 6° tolerance zone by default.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Snap Angle
The Infer Point Tool Bar The Infer Point tool bar is displayed when creating most of the curve types in the sketcher, so that you have more control over the selection of locations.
When the Infer Point toolbar is active, regardless of the point types turned on, Cursor Location is always available.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-23
Sketching
Alignment Lines While Creating Curves In the process of creating a curve, if you are horizontally or vertically opposite a control point, the system will display an alignment line. New curve being created.
Existing Curve
Alignment Lines
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Profile Tool The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs, without having to specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. Profile is accessed on the Sketch Curve tool bar.
by choosing the Profile icon
The icons at the upper left corner of the graphics screen allow you to switch between lines and arcs, and allow you to switch between entering X-Y locations and entering parameters. Arc
Line
XY
13-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Parameters
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The default settings are:
Line creation
X-Y location
Once you have created the first curve (line or arc), the system will revert to creating a line. You can change this any time you wish. You can also switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1. The circle-X" symbol controls the direction in which the arc will be created.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-25
Sketching
If the desired arc is in the wrong direction, re-cross the end of the line (with the cursor), and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol. Circle-X Symbol Arc originating from top quadrant
Arc originating from Left quadrant
Arc originating from right quadrant
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Arc originating from bottom quadrant
As you are creating curves with the profile tool, the string mode can be broken by clicking MB2.
Creating Lines
Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon tool bar.
13-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
on the Sketch Curve
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Once in line creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two options: Location (by cursor location or entering an X-Y location), and entering parameters.
There are several combinations of methods for creating a line:
Locate the start, and then locate the end.
Locate the start, and then enter the length and angle parameters.
Locate the start, enter one parameter, and then locate the end.
Enter the parameters and then locate the start.
Once you indicate a start location, the system will switch to the Parameters mode. But you can still give an end location without changing back to XY.
Creating Arcs Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon tool bar.
on the Sketch Curve
Once in arc creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is for the XY-Location/Parameters choice.
For Arc by 3 Points: creating the arc:
there are several combinations of methods for
Locate the start, locate the end, and then locate a point on the arc.
Locate the start, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end point and then determine which of the 4 options you wish to create.
The same as the previous, but enter the radius value after locating the end point, but before the point on arc.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-27
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
For Arc by Center and End Points: methods for creating the arc:
there are also several combinations of
Locate the center, locate the start point, and locate the end point. (The start point location determines the radius.)
Locate the center, locate the start point, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end point.
Locate the center, enter radius and sweep angle values and press Enter, locate the start of the sweep, and locate the direction for the sweep.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the Enter Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing back to XY.
Creating Circles
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon Curve tool bar.
on the Sketch
Once in circle creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is for the location/parameters choice.
For Circle by Center and Radius: circles:
13-28
there are several methods for creating
Locate the center, and then locate a point on the circumference of the circle.
Locate the center, enter a radius, and press Enter. The circle is created. You are then in multiple circle creation mode - just indicate another location for a circle center.
Locate the center, drag the radius until you get the size you want. Press Enter. The circle is created, and you are in multiple circle creation mode. Indicate another center.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
For Circle by 3 Points:
there are also two methods for creating the circle:
Locate three points on the circumference of the circle.
Locate two points on the circumference of the circle, enter a radius value and press Enter, then choose which of the two options you want by cursor location.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the enter Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing back to XY.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-29
Sketching
Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_skt_profile_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21. Step 3 Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Start the Modeling application.
Choose the Sketch icon.
Choose OK
to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. You are going to set the Infer Constraints Setting to make available only the constraints that you may want to apply during curve creation.
13-30
Choose Infer Constraints Settings.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Set the dialog as shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 5 Create a Profile. In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using the Profile tool.
Choose the Profile tool the graphics window.
Key in -4 for the XC value and press Tab.
EDS All Rights Reserved
and then move the cursor into
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-31
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Key in -2 for the YC value and press Enter.
Move the cursor so that the rubberĆbanding line snaps to the horizontal orientation as shown below. Horizontal Symbol
Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is going to be applied to the line.
Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint.
Now notice that as you move the cursor around the rubberĆbanding line remains horizontal.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Move the cursor to a position that defines a Length of approximately 3 inches and click MB1.
Next, you are going to create the first arc.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end point of the last line and then release.
You are now in arc creation mode.
Create the arc by indicating a location with MB1 as shown below. Notice the alignment line that aligns the center point and end points.
13-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create a horizontal line approximately 2 inches long by indicating the end point with MB1.
Next you will create another arc just like the first one, but you will use a different method.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor up and to the right from the end point of the last line and then release.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Key in .5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. Click in the graphic window to apply.
Create a horizontal line approximately 1 inch long by indicating the end point with MB1.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-33
Sketching
Create the line as shown below.
Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down, drag and release.
Key in 1.875 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
Key in 145 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. Click in the graphic window to apply.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
With MB1 indicate a cursor location, as shown below, so that horizontal and tangent constraints will be applied to the line. The line should also be approximately 2 inches long.
Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down, drag and release.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Key in 1.5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times.
Key in 90 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter. Click in the graphic window to apply.
The next line to be created is to have a perpendicular constraint relative to the 35° angle line.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-35
Sketching
Move the cursor over the line indicated below.
Move the cursor over this line.
With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note the alignment lines and the perpendicular constraint symbol.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Create a horizontal line approximately 1.5 inches long as shown below.
Move the cursor over the lines indicated below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Move the cursor over these lines.
With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note the alignment line and the parallel constraint symbol.
Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-37
Sketching
Choose Finish.
Step 6 Save and close the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Creating Fillets Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon tool bar.
on the Sketch Curve
Once in fillet creation, there is a single icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen. It is for controlling whether or not the original curves are trimmed.
You can create fillets between lines, arcs or conics. You can also create a fillet between two parallel lines. There are several methods for creating Fillets:
Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection), and then drag the size and quadrant.
Select two curves individually, and drag the size and quadrant.
Select one curve, enter a radius value, and select the second curve.
Select two curves individually, enter a radius value, and the indicate the desired quadrant.
Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. The size of the fillet is governed by where the curves are selected.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-39
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Quick Trim and Quick Extend Quick Trim
Quick Trim will trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color.
You can also trim multiple curves at one time, by using the crayon" select method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to trim away.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
You can also select a specific curve to trim to, by using ctrl-select to select the desired boundary curve. You can also select more than one bounding curve using the ctrl-select method.
13-40
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
In the example below, both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were control-selected as boundary curves. With the cursor on the top line, (between the two boundary curves), the center section is previewed as the portion to be removed.
When a curve is trimmed, appropriate constraints are automatically created. In the example above, two Point on Curve Constraints, and one Colinear constraint would be added. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to the line, the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident.
If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent. . .
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-41
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
the tangency constraint will be retained.
Quick Extend
Quick Extend will extend lines, arcs and conics to the closest curve in the sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color. The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the boundary curve.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
You can extend multiple curves at one time, by using the crayon" select method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to extend.
Before
After
You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select method. As with Quick Trim, when you use Quick Extend, appropriate constraints are automatically created.
13-42
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_fillet_1, and start the Modeling application.
You will be using this sketch geometry to create fillets.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Activate the sketch.
Double-click with MB1 on any of the sketch curves.
Step 3 Choose the Fillet icon. You first want to create 4.0 millimeter fillets in the upper left and lower left corners of the sketch. Step 4 Make sure Trim Inputs is on (depressed). Step 5 Create a 4 millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L20, trimming the lines, and do it with a single select.
Enter 4 in the Radius field on the graphics screen, and press Enter.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-43
Sketching
Select both lines at the same time, by selecting at their intersection.
Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can select which quadrant you want.
Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the desired quadrant.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 6 Create a four millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L17, with a single select, and this time do not trim the lines being filleted.
13-44
Turn off Trim Inputs.
Select the two lines at their intersection.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select in the upper right quadrant.
Step 7 Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18. Select by dragging across the two lines. The 4.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the graphics screen.
With MB1 held down, drag across the two lines as below: (This is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted. The curves crossed with the crayon" are the curves selected.)
Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-45
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Step 8 Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the crayon", but his time do NOT use a radius value.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field.
Drag (with MB1), as shown below:
It used the selection location of the curves to determine the radius.
Step 9 Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19, and drag the size and quadrant.
13-46
Individually select the lines L18 and L19.
Drag the cursor around the screen.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below.
Choose Finish.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 10 Close the part file.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-47
Sketching
Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part file will be compliant with class standards. Step 3 Create a sketch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Enter the Modeling application.
Choose Sketch.
Click on the sketch name; key in s21_profile and press Enter.
Choose OK
to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. In this sketch we do not want to apply any constraints at this time, so you will toggle all constraints off.
13-48
Choose Infer Constraints Settings.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Set the dialog as shown below.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Create the sketch curves to define the main profile.
Choose Profile.
Create the 4 lines as shown below.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-49
Sketching
Choose Fillet.
Turn on Trim Inputs.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1, 2, and then a cursor location at 3.
2 3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
1
A fillet is created and the lines are trimmed to the tangent points. The system also displays tangent symbols at the 2 tangent points.
13-50
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1, 2, and then a cursor location at 3.
3 1
2
Key in 1 for the Radius value and press Enter.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
1
2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-51
Sketching
The 1 inch radius fillet was created and the lines trimmed to the tangent points.
Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
2
1
Step 6 Define the holes of the gasket.
13-52
Choose Infer Constraints Settings.
Toggle Coincident
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
on.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Circle.
At the approximate center of the profile, click and drag to create a circle similar to the one shown below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ Move the cursor over and along the arc on the left side of the ÏÏÏ profile, until the arc center symbol (1) appears, then click and drag to create a circle with a diameter of approximately 0.75.
1
The system now will infer a constraint of coincident between the arc and the circle.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-53
Sketching
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Create the circle for the opposite side using the same method.
The sketch of the profile is now complete. The shape and design intent will be further refined in a later activity with the application of dimensional and geometric constraints.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Move the reference features to the appropriate layer to conform with class standards.
Choose Format→Move to Layer from the main menu.
Select the datum plane and 2 datum axes.
Choose OK.
Enter layer number 61 as the destination layer to move the objects to and choose OK.
Step 8 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
13-54
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_quick_1, and start the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Trim curves with Quick Trim.
DoubleĆclick on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose Quick Trim.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-55
Sketching
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-56
Select the line where the arrow is pointing in the illustration below.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the 2 curves as shown below.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
CtrlĆSelect the curves labeled 1 and 2 for boundaries. Select on curves 3 and 4 to trim the center portion.
1
3 4 2
Step 3 Extending curves with Quick Extend.
Choose Quick Extend.
Place the cursor on the arc at location 1 as labeled below. 1
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-57
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
The status line informs you that the system cannot extend the curve. This is because there is no other curve that would intersect with the arc.
Place the cursor on the arc at location 2 as labeled below.
2
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
This time notice how the system provides a preview of the extension.
Select the arc at location 2 to create the extension.
Step 4 Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick Extend until the instructor is ready to continue.
Choose Finish.
Step 5 Close the part file.
13-58
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Sketch Points Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects. The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points. By controlling the locations of these sketch points the line itself may be controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
Fillet
Line
Arc Circle
Spline
+
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Point Ellipse
DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF) Degree of freedom arrows occur at sketch points to indicate that the solver is unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch plane. DOF arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or constraints; they are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point with arrowheads pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when the sketch point has no constraints). An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the vertical direction, both up and down. Should there be DOF arrows at a given point in both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-59
Sketching
These arrows provide visual feedback to the user while in the process of constraining the sketch.
(no display) Undefined in X and Y Directions
Undefined in Y Direction only
Undefined in X Direction only
Defined in X and Y Directions
The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location of the sketch points.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-60
Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined if the user so desires.
Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter defined.
Ellipse -An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future editing.
Fillet - Fillets are a specialized case of arc; by definition a fillet is tangent to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define the endpoints.
Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined.
Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific locations in space.
Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located. Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however, since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no way to locate their defining points using constraints.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Constraining Sketches Design Intent The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. This is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will react to changing input. These rules are called constraints. As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch profile to update in the manner desired. Unigraphics sketches are not required to be fully constrained. A group of these rules may be thought of as a constraint set. The constraint set is comprised of two types of constraints, dimensional and geometric and are accessed from the Sketch Constraints tool bar.
The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Create Constraints Dimensions
Creating Dimensional Constraints A dimensional constraint establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the length of a line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two objects (such as the distance between two points). Dimensional constraints appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions, changing the value of the dimensional constraints changes the shape and or size of the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This changes the feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-61
Sketching
The Dimensions icon
accesses the Dimensions dialog.
You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some of the preferences. There are nine icons located near the top of the dialog box. The top leftĆhand icon is the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that are selected and where their dimension text is located. It is also the default icon. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are filters" that when selected will only allow a specific dimension type to be created. Because of this, certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the dimension type selected.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
As dimensional constraints are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking the left mouse button. During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all of the geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type desired and reselect the geometry.
13-62
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
As dimensional constraints are being created, the system creates an expression. This expression's name and value are displayed in the current expression fields of the Constraints dialog box. This places the value field in overstrike mode so the user may enter the desired dimensional constraint. A slider is also provided below the value text and may be used to change the value. Enter new statement or numeric value
Enter new name
Use slider bar to change value
Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance of the dimensional constraint. The leftĆhand option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the dimensional constraint will be displayed. Options are for automatic text placement where the system decides the appearance, manual text placement with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines. Auto Placement
Manual Placement, Arrows In Manual Placement, Arrows Out
The rightĆhand option menu is for defining whether the dimension's leader is attached to the right or left of the dimension text. Leader From Left
Leader From Right
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-63
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension creation.
Text Height The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry field at the bottom of the dialog box. This value may be changed any time the Dimensions dialog box is active. The default value is .150 inches. There are no limits to values for this field. Modifying this value changes all the dimensional constraints in the active sketch.
Dimensional Constraint Types Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types listed below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, arcs, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the XĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.
YC ZC
.500
13-64
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
XC
4.000
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the YĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.
YC
2.000
ZC
XC
.500
Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint directly between two sketch entities. The parallel dimension is the shortest distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected. Arcs selected for 1.23 dimension
.500
1.23
Line endpoints selected for .500 dimension
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-65
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Perpendicular - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the normal distance. The first object selected using this method must be linear; the second will be a point inferred from the next object selected.
.8502
.6302
Angular - Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimensional constraint between two lines. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection. Only linear objects may be selected with this method.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
p0=45.507
13-66
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Radius - Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
R p4=0.250
Diameter- Used to filter the system to specify a diametral size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
p1=2.568
Perimeter- The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. After the desired curves are selected the user chooses OK, a dimensional constraint is created and its name is prefixed with Perimeter, i.e. Perimeter_p7=6.456. There is no graphical representation of this constraint on the graphics screen.
Editing Dimensional Constraints` The editing of dimensional constraints may be achieved as follows:
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-67
Sketching
To edit the value, simply double click on the dimension and edit the value in the text box and press Enter.
To edit the position, simply drag a dimension's location.
Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed below:
Name - Enter a new name in the text entry field.
Value - Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider.
Position - Click and hold the left mouse button to drag the dimension to its new position.
Text placement method - Select a different option from the option menu.
Leader side - Select a different option from the option menu.
Text height - Enter a new text size in the text entry field.
NOTE: The name and value of a dimensional constraint may also be edited by using the Expression Editor. As dimensional constraints are edited, the constraints are evaluated and the geometry is modified.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Delay Evaluation At times it is advantageous not to have the geometry change until all of the dimensional constraints have been modified. The Delay Evaluation is a toggle on the Sketch tool bar that controls this condition.
Evaluate Sketch The Evaluate Sketch button is provided so that the user may control sketch evaluation when the Delay Evaluation toggle is on. Sketches are evaluated automatically when the Constraints dialog box is exited.
Update Model The Update Model icon located on the Sketch tool bar may be used to force the model to update without leaving the sketch function.
13-68
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
When a sketch is deactivated the display of the dimensional constraints is disabled. A toggle switch labeled Retain Dimension is supplied on the Sketch Preferences dialog box to enable the display should there be a need to display dimensions without an active sketch (such as to reference expression names between sketches, plotting, etc.).
Creating Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius). Geometric constraints have no editable numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied.
The Create Constraints icon There is no dialog.
ÏÏÏ 13 activates the process of creating constraints. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Constraints are created by selecting the geometry, and then choosing the desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen. Only icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be displayed.
If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time, you can control-select the objects. Then the icons for constraints will remain on the screen after you choose the first constraint. You can use MB2 to cancel creation of constraints .
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-69
Sketching
Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fixed
Constant Angle
Collinear
Concentric
Horizontal
Tangent
Vertical
Equal Radius
Parallel
Coincident
Perpendicular
Point on Curve
Equal Length
Midpoint
Constant Length
Point on String
Displaying Constraint Symbols Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always displayed. The other symbols are not displayed at all times.
The Show All Constraints icon constraints in the active sketch.
will display the symbols for all the
Sometimes, when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed out), the symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them. The following is a definition of each of the available geometric constraints: Coincident - Defines two or more points as having the same location. Collinear - Defines two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through the same theoretical straight line.
13-70
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Concentric - Defines two or more arcs as having the same center. Constant Angle - Defines a line as having a constant angle. Constant Length - Defines a line as having a constant length. Equal Length - Defines two or more lines as being the same length. Equal Radius - Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius. Fix - Defines fixed characteristics for geometry, depending on the type of geometry selected, as follows:
Arc or circle - defines the radius and the location of the centerpoint.
Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center, or ellipse center - locates the centerpoint.
Arc or elliptical arc endpoint - locates the endpoint.
Ellipse - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii.
Ellipse center - locates the centerpoint.
Elliptical arc - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii.
Line - defines the angle and length.
Point - defines the location.
Spline - removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or rigidly dragged).
Spline control point - locates the control point.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Horizontal - Defines a line as horizontal. Midpoint of Curve - Defines the location of a sketch point as coincident with the midpoint of a curve. NOTE:
For the Midpoint of Curve constraint, select the curve anywhere other than at its end points.
Mirror - Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other. This constraint is automatically created when the mirror function is used. It cannot be created manually.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-71
Sketching
Parallel - Defines two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other. Perpendicular - Defines two linear objects as being perpendicular to each other. Point on Curve - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on a curve. Point on String - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on an extracted string. Slope of Curve - Defines a spline, selected at a defining point, and another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point. Scale, NonĆUniform - Thus constrained, a spline will scale in the horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during modification.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Scale, Uniform - A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes. A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal spline point as the uses of the two different constraint types are mutually exclusive. Tangent - Defines two objects as being tangent to each other. Vertical - Defines a line as vertical.
13-72
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Show/Remove Constraints The Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of constraints. The constraints may be listed by object/s or all of the constraints of the active sketch may be listed at once. Determines which objects will have their constraints listed. Determines what type of constraints will be listed.
Determines if the filtered constraint will be included or excluded in the list.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Determines what category of constraints will be listed.
Actions that can be taken on the listed constraints.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-73
Sketching
Constraint Interrogation One way to determine what geometric constraints are present is to pass the selection ball over a sketch object. If the object has a constraint associated with it, the sketch object will be preĆhighlighted as well as other sketch objects that share the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch objects. If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints associated with it, preĆhighlighting does not occur. The constraint types and their markers are shown in the figure below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fix
Perpendicular
Concentric
Tangent
Coincident
Equal Length
Colinear
Equal Radius
Point on Curve
Constant Length
Point on String
Constant Angle
Midpoint on Curve
Mirror
Horizontal
Slope of Curve
Vertical
Scale, Uniform
Parallel
Scale, NonĆUniform
Constraint Categories There are two major categories of geometric constraints, Explicit and Inferred. Explicit constraints are constraints that the user has created by assignment using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints are the Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and assigned. The user has the option to list only the Explicit, or Inferred constraints, or both may be listed at the same time.
13-74
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Constraint Listing The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. They are: Selected Object Once an object is selected, the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog box. To view constraints associated with a different sketch object, simply select the new object. Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects; the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog box. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting the object. All in Active Sketch List all the constraints of the active sketch, depending on the selected constraint category.
Listing Box Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the graphics area. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.
Removing Constraints Constraints may be deleted 3 ways:
Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s).
Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection tool bar), select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen, and then choose the Delete icon.
Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen, and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-75
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Undo The user may access undo from the edit pulldown on the main menu, the third mouse button popĆup menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the creation procedure back one step at a time.
Dragging Geometry UnderĆconstrained geometry can be dragged by simply holding down and dragging MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s).
Selection When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select Sketch Objects curves and dimensions.
allows selection of constraint symbols on the graphics
Select Constraints screen.
Deselect All
allows selection of all objects in the sketch -
deselects all objects that are currently selected.
Constraint Conditions When the Constraints dialog box is active, the status line lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully constrained, under constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the status line will indicate the number of constraints needed.
13-76
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships with each other.
In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile, it may be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to completely define all sketch geometry. It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint set applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner. A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to completely locate each sketch point. DegreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are displayed at each point that could not be solved to identify the direction in which that point remains free to move.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-77
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Constraining Example Lines constrained to be horizontal
LINE A
Lines constrained to be vertical
In the profile above, some elements are partially constrained due to system applied constraints, such as the 3 degree snap angle default for horizontal and vertical lines. Line A has a system applied vertical geometric constraint. The bottom point of line A has a fixed geometric constraint applied by the user. The degreeĆofĆfreedom arrow at the top of line A now points in the Y axis direction. This indicates the point is constrained in the X axis direction but not in the Y axis direction.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Degree of freedom arrows may assist in the constraining process; however, until the location of at least one object is defined, no degree of freedom arrows will be removed. Defining the location of an object may be accomplished in a number of ways. Sketch objects may be located relative to edges of a solid model, datum planes, or to datum axes using geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, or positioning dimensions. Fixing the location of a point fully defines the location of that point to the solver. It is important to remember that there is no numeric input in fixing an object. An object must be created in the proper location or be otherwise located prior to fixing in order for the fix constraint to be properly applied. A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is supplied to the solver. For instance, specifying a geometric constraint on two lines that identifies them as being equal in length, then placing a dimensional constraint on each to identify their length would cause the sketch to be over constrained.
13-78
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The system highlights in yellow the geometry and dimensional constraints that are causing the over constrained condition in order to prompt for the over constrained situation to be corrected. An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the geometric configuration. The sketch is displayed in the last solved condition. Dimensional constraints that are not related to the over constrained condition are displayed in green. Geometry that is not related to the over constrained condition is displayed in cyan. Dimensional constraints that are in conflict in the current configuration with the current constraint set are displayed in pink. Geometry that is not solvable in the current configuration with the current constraint set is displayed in gray. At times the system displays all geometry in gray and all dimensional constraints in pink. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Constraints may need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint set.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-79
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile Constrain the pipe vise profile sketch to satisfy the stated design intent. Design Intent Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be controlled: The outside envelope of the part. The included angle of the angled lines. The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally. The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled by the radius at the bottom of the slot. Step 1 Open pau_pipevise_1 and start the Modeling application.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Activate the sketch S21_PROFILE.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve.
Step 3 View the system applied constraints.
13-80
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The Show/Remove Constrains dialog box is displayed.
Choose the radio button in the List Constraints For: area for All In Active Sketch.
Ensure that the Show Constraints category to Explicit.
The system created constraints are now displayed in the list box. The dialog box should look similar to the graphic shown at right.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the first constraint in the list.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-81
Sketching
The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics area. There should be one horizontal line highlighted in the graphics window. Let the instructor know if this is not the case.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of the list box to browse through the constraint list.
Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box.
Step 4 View the degree of freedom arrows.
Choose the Create Constraints icon.
Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the sketch points. Even though most of the objects in the sketch have constraints associated with them, the sketch points are free to move in all directions. This is because the system cannot locate any of the points relative to model space.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 5 Constrain the location of a point.
Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line.
Select the vertical datum axis.
In the upper left corner of the screen choose the Point on Curve icon.
13-82
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the constraint. The point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in the horizontal direction.
Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line.
Select the horizontal datum axis.
Choose the Point on Curve icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-83
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. The shared sketch point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in both the horizontal and vertical directions. The degree of freedom arrows go away at this point, and, due to the horizontal and vertical constraints on the lines that share the sketch point, one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines has disappeared.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 6 Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61. The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch. You will now move them to ease selection of objects and clean up the screen display.
Choose Finish.
Choose Format→Move to Layer
Choose Type.
Choose Datums and choose OK.
Choose Select All and OK.
Enter 61 in the dialog box layer field and press Enter.
Step 7 Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design intent.
13-84
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Create Constraints.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at the top of the profile.
Choose Collinear
and Equal Length.
Now Equal Length
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Deselect All.
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot taking note on which side you choose. Select the end of the short vertical line on the same side of the arc.
Choose Tangent.
Repeat the process for the other side of the slot.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc center.
Choose Point on Curve.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-85
Sketching
Choose Midpoint.
Choose Deselect All.
Select the line between the midpoint and the arc center.
Choose Vertical. Now vertical
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling portions of the design intent will allow the profile to be changed by modifying the numerical values.
13-86
Choose the Dimensions icon.
With the constraint type set to infer, select the bottom horizontal line. Drag the dimension to position it and select with MB1 to place it.
Type in a value of 5 and press Enter.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it. Change the value to 3.75.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension. Change its value to .5.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the lower end (over half way, not endpoint) of the left angled line. Select the right end of the top left horizontal line, avoiding its control points. Place the angular dimension and change its value to 45°.
Select here first Select here second
Select the left end of the top right horizontal line, avoiding its control points. Select the bottom end of the right angled line. Place this angular dimension and change its value to the 'p' number assigned to the other angular dimension.
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. Place the radius dimension and change its value to .25.
Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint and place this vertical dimension. Change its value to 1.5 and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-87
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully constrained. Remember that there is no need to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner desired.
Step 8 Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included angle in the notch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Double click on the first angular dimensional constraint that was created and change it from a 45° to 30°.
Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of this change. Should that have not been our intent, we would have to constrain the sketch in a different manner.
Choose Finish.
Step 9 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
13-88
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket In this activity you will fully constrain the sketch that was created earlier. Step 1 Open ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials or open pau_gasket_1 and save as ***_gasket_1a. Step 2 Make Layer 61 Selectable in order to view the reference features.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Activate the sketch containing the profile.
Ensure that the Modeling application is active.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.
Fit the view.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-89
Sketching
Use the steps on the following pages to constrain the profile as shown below.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 4 Review the existing constraints.
13-90
Choose Show/Remove Constraints.
Choose All in Active Sketch.
Set Show Constraints to Explicit.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Review the constraints by clicking on each one in the listing and observe which curves are highlighted in the graphic window. Notice how each curve in the profile is tangent to its adjacent curve. This is due to the creation method that was used.
In the Show/Remove Constraints dialog, choose Selected Objects.
Select one of the circles.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Notice that there are no constraints listed.
Set Show Constraints to Inferred. Now observe that a Coincident constraint is listed.
Select the circle on the other side and notice how the system indicates an arc to which it is coincident.
Choose Cancel.
Toggle Show All Constraints
on.
Notice the two Equal Radius symbols.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-91
Sketching
Choose the Select Constraints icon toolbar.
from the Selection
Place the cursor over one of the Equal Radius symbols.
The arcs that share this constraint are highlighted.
Place the cursor over one of the Coincident symbols.
The circle and arc that share that point of incidence are highlighted.
Choose the Select Sketch Objects icon.
Step 5 Constrain the sketch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Create Constraints.
Notice the Degree Of Freedom markers associated with the sketch points, remember that these are supplied to give feedback on the constraint condition of the sketch. These markers will be removed from the display as the sketch points are explicitly located.
13-92
Select the center circle and the bottom arc, avoiding control points along the way.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Concentric.
Step 6 Locate the profile in space.
Select the arc center of the center circle and the horizontal datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve.
The entire profile moves to follow the constraint just applied.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-93
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Select the arc center of the center circle again and the vertical datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve.
Note that the degree of freedom markers at the large arc center have been removed, this point is now explicitly located.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 7 Apply Point on Curve design intent. The design intent is that the arc center of all three circles lie on the same horizontal centerline.
13-94
Select the arc center of the left circle and the horizontal datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve.
Repeat the above actions for the right circle, constraining it to fall on the centerline" represented by the datum axis.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Note how the profile changes shape to obey the constraints as they are applied. Also note that the Degree Of Freedom markers at the selected points have been removed in the vertical direction. These points has been constrained in the vertical direction but are still free to move in the horizontal direction.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 8 Applying equal radius design intent. The upper and lower center arcs are intended to be the same radius. The circles on either end are intended to be the same size as shown by the dimension.
Select the upper and lower arcs of the profile. Be sure not to include control points in the selection process, points and curves have a different constraint set than those of two curves.
Choose Equal Radius.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-95
Sketching
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Repeat the process for the two small circles.
Step 9 Apply dimensional constraints to define the size of the profile.
Choose the Dimensions icon.
Use the Inferred dimension type to create all of the dimensions shown below.
Change Auto Placement to Manual Placement, Arrows In.
Select the center circle and place the dimension.
Location of the dimension is not as important as being able to read it.
13-96
Change the value of the dimension to 2 and press Enter.
Create a horizontal dimension between the arc center of the left circle and the arc center of the center circle. Place the dimension.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Change the value of the dimension to 2.625.
Create a horizontal dimension between the arc centers of the two smaller circles and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to 5.25.
The status line indicates that the sketch needs 5 constraints in order to be fully constrained.
Select one of the end circles and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to .5.
Select one of the end arcs and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to .5.
Select the lower arc and place the dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to 1.5.
The status line indicates that the sketch needs 2 more constraints. Notice that we forgot to create a concentric constraint between the upper arc and the center circle.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-97
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Choose Create Constraints.
Select the center circle and the upper arc, avoiding control points.
Choose Concentric.
The status line now states that the Sketch is fully constrained.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Create Constraints
to exit that function.
Step 10 Change the design intent by making the gasket longer.
13-98
Double click on the dimension with the value 5.25.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Edit the value to 7.25.
Notice that the profile updates and the tangent condition is maintained.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Finish.
Step 11 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-99
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Convert To/From Reference At times it is nice to be able to see what the effects of a change are numerically, but adding a dimensional constraint to do this causes the sketch to be over constrained. Additionally, sketch curves may need to be associated to other sketch curves that are not intended to represent a portion of the swept feature. To support these needs, Unigraphics allows Reference objects within sketches. These reference objects may be either curves or dimensional constraints. The Convert To/From Reference icon is located in the sketch management area of the Sketch Tools dialog box.
To change the status of the objects, set the radio button to the status desired, select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. An option menu is provided to filter for All (the default), Curve, or Dimension. Reference curves are displayed in gray color and phantom line font. Reference curves are ignored during sweep operations. Reference dimensional constraints are shown in white color and only the value portion of the expression is shown, regardless of the preference setting. The value for this reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed, but it does not control the sketch geometry with which it is associated.
13-100
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions In this activity, you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the design intent. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch, but its simplicity allows the concept of over constrained to be easily shown. Design Intent Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. The shape of the sketch should remain rectangular.
Width
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Length
Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in. Step 2 Create a sketch on Layer 21.
Start the Modeling application.
Change the work layer to 21.
Choose Sketch.
Choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-101
Sketching
Step 3 Create a rectangle.
Choose the Rectangle icon.
Select a cursor location, then drag and select a second cursor location to create the rectangle.
Choose Cancel.
Step 4 Interrogate the constraints that currently exist on this sketch.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.
Choose the radio button for All In Active Sketch.
Set the Show Constraints to Explicit.
Highlight the top constraint in the list and use the down arrow button to browse through the constraints.
Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Apply constraints to locate the sketch on the sketch plane.
13-102
Choose the Create Constraints icon.
Select an endpoint of the left vertical line and the vertical datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve.
Select an endpoint of the bottom horizontal line and the horizontal datum axis.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Choose Point on Curve.
Step 6 Move the reference features to the proper layer.
Choose Finish.
Choose Format→Move to Layer
Select the reference objects and choose OK.
Type 61 in the destination layer field and choose OK.
DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 7 Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and width of the part as per the design intent.
p3=2.750
p2=4.500
Choose the Dimensions icon.
With the dimension type set to Infer, select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimension. Change the value to 4.5.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-103
Sketching
Select the left hand vertical line and place the dimension. Change the value to 2.75.
Choose OK.
As dimensional constraints are being created, the degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are eliminated. The sketch is fully constrained using one vertical and one horizontal dimensional constraint, along with the geometric constraints of horizontal and vertical that the system applied to the lines due to the manner of construction. Design Change Modify the sketch so that it can be controlled by the angle and length of a diagonal line.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
p5=5.274
p4=31.430
Step 8 Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to reference.
13-104
Choose the Line icon.
Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint to define the line.
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon ensure that Reference is toggled On.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
and
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
Select the diagonal line and choose OK.
Step 9 Apply an angular dimensional constraint.
Choose the Dimensions icon.
Select the right end of the lower horizontal line and the right end of the diagonal line, and indicate a location for the angular dimension.
The angle will be applied to the ends of the lines closest to the cursor position in a counter clockwise manner. At this point the system has more information than is required. The sketch is over constrained. The system changes the color of the sketch objects that have constraints applied to them that are associated to the over constrained condition. In this case all of the active sketch curves and dimensional constraints are displayed in yellow. To correct the over constrained condition, one or more of the offending constraints must by removed. Remember, the new design intent is to drive the sketch with angular and diagonal length dimensions. Step 10 Apply a parallel dimensional constraint.
Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension. Change the value of the dimension to 6.5.
Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the value is modified. The system leaves the geometry in its last solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-105
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Sketching
Choose Cancel.
p5=6.500
p3=2.750
p4=35.000
p2=4.500
Step 11 Convert sketch dimensions to reference.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon.
Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions, and choose OK.
The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. The reference dimensional constraints are shown to reflect the value only. Reference dimensions do not apply rules to the geometry to which they are attached. Another method of resolving the over constrained condition would have been to delete the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
Choose Finish.
Step 12 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
13-106
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Sketching
SUMMARY
This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation. Sketches may be used to define a base feature, guide paths, and additional associative features to the base feature. A sketch parametrically controls curves and captures design intent. To do this constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent. The level of constraint, partial or full, is determined by the design intent and what is necessary to capture it.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
In this lesson you:
Created a sketch on a fixed datum plane.
Created a sketch on an existing solid face.
Freehand sketched curves in a sketch.
Constrained Sketches
Created Dimensional Constraints
Edited Dimensional Constraints
Created Geometric Constraints
Created Inferred Geometric Constraints
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
13-107
Sketching
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
13-108
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Swept Features and Boolean Operations Lesson 14
PURPOSE
To introduce Swept Features and Boolean Operations.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Extrude a body.
Extrude a body with offsets.
Create a Body of Revolution.
Create a solid by sweeping a profile along a guide curve.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-1
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Types of Swept Features Swept features/bodies are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch curves, solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies. An Extruded Body is one that is swept in a linear direction for a specified distance. Resulting feature
Section string
Direction
A Body of Revolution is one that has been rotated around a specified axis.
Axis
Section string
Resulting feature
A Sweep Along Guide body is one that has been swept along a guide string.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Section string
Resulting feature Guide string
The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section string and the guide string.
14-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Creating Swept Features from Sketches When sweeping a sketch you may or may not want to sweep all of the sketch curves. By default the system selects the entire sketch when any sketch curve is selected. When using a sketch to define the section string do one of the following:
To select all the curves in a sketch - select any one curve belonging to the sketch.
To select individual curves within a sketch - choose the Curve or Chain Curves option, and then select the desired curves.
Sweeping a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may define multiple features.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-3
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Extrude The Insert"Form Feature"Extrude option allows a solid body/feature to be created by sweeping planar, section string geometry in a linear direction for a specified distance.
Rules for Extruding Section String Objects The Body Type switch found under Preferences→Modeling, controls whether a solid body or a sheet body is created when extruding section string geometry. When set to Solid" the following rules will apply:
Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body.
Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole.
Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed creates a sheet body unless extrude with offsets is used.
Extrusion Options Direction & Distance option allows specification of the extrusion direction and the start and end distances of the extrusion relative to the plane of the selected section string. The extrusion does not need to start at the plane of the section string.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Trim to Face/Plane option allows the end distance of an extrusion to be associated to an existing solid face or datum plane. The extrusion starts at, and is normal to, the plane of the section string. Trim Between Two Faces/Plane option allows the start and end of the extrusion to be associated with specified faces or planes of the same body regardless of the location of the section string geometry. The extrusion will be normal to the plane of the section string.
14-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 1 - Swept Features In this activity you will start to create the draglink part. As you work through this lesson and learn new sweep skills, you will continue to develop the draglink by applying those skills. Step 1 Open part file pau_draglink_2, save as ***_draglink_2, and start the modeling application.
Step 2 Extrude the curves.
Choose Extrude.
Select all of the curves and choose OK.
Choose Direction & Distance.
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.
Key in the following: Start Distance . End Distance . First Offset . . . . Second Offset . Taper Angle . . .
Choose OK.
Fit the View.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
0 152.5 0 0 0
Step 3 Save the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-5
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Boolean Operations Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. Unigraphics senses when a solid already exists in a file and another is being created, the following menu appears for the Boolean Operation.
The new solid may be created as a separate solid using Create, or a Boolean operation (Unite, Subtract, or Intersect) may be performed on the two solids during creation to make one resultant solid. The Boolean Operations may also be created as a separate feature using the Insert"Feature Operation options shown in the menu below. When using these operations, a Target Solid and a Tool Solid need to be specified to perform the boolean operation.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
14-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
NOTE: Creation of Booleans as separate features allows for future editing of the Boolean operations.
Defining Target and Tool Solids The Target solid is the solid body on which operations are executed. In the figure below, to unite the two cylinders to the block, the block is chosen as the target solid. The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-7
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
NOTE: The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean operation result. Therefore, the resultant solid inherits the layer, material density, etc. of the Target Solid. Target solid
Tool solids
The Boolean Operations are described below.
Unite This option allows two or more solid bodies to be combined into one. Target solid
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Completed solid
Tool solids
Before
14-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
After
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Subtract This option allows material to be removed from a solid body (Target Body) by using another solid body as the Tool Solid, leaving empty space where the Tool body existed. Tool solid Target solid
Before
Tool solid
After
Intersect This Boolean allows a new solid to be created from two solids. The resultant solid will be that portion which is common to both of the selected solids. Before
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
After
Target solid Tool solid
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-9
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Swept Feature Errors If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change in topology, the system would warn you with the following message.
If you attempt to unite, subtract, or intersect a tool solid with a target solid and the two solids do not touch, the system would warn you with the following message.
If you attempt to subtract a tool solid from a target solid and the operation would produce a zero thickness, the system would warn you with the following message.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Generator Curves
Zero thickness
14-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Rules for Extruding With Taper
The Taper Start radio buttons determine if the taper starts At Defining String or At Start Distance when a taper is specified.
A positive taper angle creates an inward taper.
A negative angle creates an outward taper.
If the section string included interior holes, the holes would be tapered in the opposite direction to the outside objects. Positive Taper Angle
Negative Taper Angle
Normal vector
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Plane of selected objects
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-11
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Extruding With Offsets Once an extrusion method has been specified, arrows are displayed in the graphics area to relay information. The arrow displayed in solid font is the Extrusion Direction arrow, indicating the direction that positive values will be extruded. The arrow displayed in dashed font is the Offset Direction arrow, indicating the direction that positive offset values will be applied. The extrusion values as well as the offset values may be entered in the Parameters menu.
Positive Extrusion Direction Positive Offset Direction
YC ZC
XC
Using positive values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the direction of the arrow. Using negative values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the opposite direction of the dashed arrow.
Offset Examples
Offset
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Section Geometry
Offset on arrow side (Positive) Section Geometry
Offset on opposite side (Negative)
14-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Offset on both sides (One offset neg., one offset pos.)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets In this activity, additional extruded features will be added to complete the part. Step 1 Open the part pau_extrude_1. Step 2 Save the file as ***_extrude_1 where *** represent your initials.
Step 3 Create a tube by extruding with an offset.
Choose Extrude.
Select the inside, large circle as the section geometry.
Choose OK.
Choose Direction Distance.
Choose OK to accept the default direction (vector pointing up).
Enter the following values: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle =
0 2.5 0 .25 0
If the offset vector is pointing away from the center of the part, use a negative value for the Second Offset. If it is pointing to the center use a positive value for the Second Offset.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-13
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Press Enter.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the base as the target body.
Select the tube as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu.
The selected curve is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow, to a distance 2.5 units from the start distance. The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 units thick inside the generator curve. This thickness was defined by the value entered in the Second Offset field due to the direction of the dashed arrow. The current model should look like the figure below.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.
14-14
Choose Extrude.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion. Select this edge
Choose OK.
Choose Direction Distance.
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-15
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle =
0 .25 0 .25 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the main body as the target body.
Select the feature that was just created as the tool body.
Choose OK.
The selected edge is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow, to a distance .25 units from the start distance. The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 units thick outside the generator edge. This thickness was defined by the values entered in the First and Second Offset fields relative to dashed arrow.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Subtract an extrusion from the flange.
14-16
Choose Extrude.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Select the edge as shown to extrude. Select this edge
Choose OK.
Choose Direction Distance.
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.
The edge must be extruded with the offsets in the proper direction to create the groove shown below.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle =
EDS All Rights Reserved
0 .075 .15 .275 0
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-17
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose OK.
Choose Subtract.
Step 6 Save and close the part.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
14-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Sweep along Guide The Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide option allows features to be created by sweeping a section string along a guide string.
Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide
Just like other sweep types, solid or sheet bodies are created based on the current Modeling Preferences Body Type setting and the closure condition of the curves (i.e. open string or enclosed string).
An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed loop will automatically cap the end faces, providing the Modeling Preferences Body Type is set to Solid.
Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using the sweep with offset option.
Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-19
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp corners, it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a sharp corner. The section string also needs to be located on an end point of one of the guide string objects. Guide string Two separate line entities
Section string here located on an endpoint
Do not put Section string here
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Solid body
14-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide In this activity, use the third method of sweeping, Sweep along Guide to create a solid body. Step 1 Open part file pau_sweep_1 and start the Modeling application. The curves are displayed in two colors. Sweep the section string along the guide string to create a shape that could be used as a base or platform.
Guide string
Section string
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide.
The Cue prompts to Select section string. Select the orange curves and confirm the selections as necessary.
Choose OK.
The cue prompts to Select guide string.
Select the yellow guide string and confirm the selections as necessary.
Choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the direction.
The cue prompts to Specify Sweep offsets and a dialog box displays for First Offset and Second Offset. Offsets work the same way as for extrusions, but they will not be used here.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-21
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Ensure that the First and Second Offsets are set to 0 (zero).
Choose OK on the dialog box to create the solid body.
The base is created. Shade the display if desired to better view the model. The open section string was swept along the full length of the guide string and the system automatically caps the open ends to produce a solid body.
The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any section string along a guide string.
Optional Challenge - Undo the solid and create it again, this time use a .25 single offset toward the outside of the curves. The part should resemble the figure shown.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Close the part, do not save.
14-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Defining a Sweep Region In some cases when sweep generator geometry is selected, there is a possibility that multiple sweep areas may exist. At these times you will be prompted by the system to define a region to sweep. The system will prompt you to define a region when the selected generator geometry is made up of one of the following:
Noncontiguous geometry that makes up a closed loop.
Geometry that provides more than one possible sweep area.
Example of noncontiguous curves. Noncontiguous closed loop made up of 4 curves.
Region 1
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Region 2
Selecting these six curves produces two possible sweep regions.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-23
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part.
Step 2 Create a feature by sweeping curves along a path.
Make layer 42 the work layer and all other layers invisible.
Notice that there is no top to the IĆBeam shape.
Generator geometry.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Feature to be created.
14-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Make layer 41 selectable.
These curves will be used to define the sweep cross section.
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide.
Select the curves shown above for the section string and choose OK.
Indicate the region by selecting inside the IĆBeam shape.
Make layer 1 the work layer and layer 43 selectable. Fit the view.
Define the guide string by selecting the yellow curves and choose OK.
Key in the following: First Offset . . . . 0 Second Offset . 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the first body created as the target body.
Select the IĆBeam body as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Fit the view.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Save the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-25
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Revolve The Insert"Form Feature"Revolve option allows you to create a feature by rotating a section string around an axis through a specified angle.
Rules for Revolving Section String Objects Just like with extruded section strings, a solid or sheet body is created based on the closure condition of the curves and current Body Type setting found under Preferences→Modeling. Exceptions apply as follows:
Revolving open section strings will cause the system to automatically cap the end faces to produce a solid body however, the rotation must be a full 360° and the Modeling Preferences Body Type switch must be set to Solid.
The Right Hand rule determines direction of swept.
Body of Revolution Options Axis & Angle - This option allows creation of a single feature by revolving the section curves about a specified axis.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
The amount of rotation is determined by entering a Start Angle and End Angle. The total number of degrees cannot exceed 360.
The plane of the selected curves is considered zero degrees. The angles entered determine the number of degrees the system revolves the selected curves about the selected axis.
Entering a Start Angle which is greater than the End Angle causes the system to sweep in the direction of negative rotation. First Offset and Second Offset function in the same manner as the offsets discussed in extruded bodies.
Trim To Face/Plane - This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving the section geometry to a trimming face or datum plane. Trim Between Two Faces/Planes - This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving section curves between two trimming faces or datum planes.
14-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution In this activity, you will create revolved features using a variety of methods. Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_1. Step 2 Select and Revolve the Section String.
Choose Revolve.
The Chain Curves option is an easy way to select a group of contiguous curves.
Choose Chain Curves from the dialog box.
If the loop is closed, pick any one curve and choose OK, the entire string is then selected. If the loop is open as below, the start of the chain must be defined as well as the chain direction. The cue line will prompt you to Select Start Curve of Chain. Care must be taken to select the first object such that the system may chain toward the last object.
Select the curves as shown below.
Select this end of this object first Select this object second or choose OK.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Chain Direction
Choose OK twice.
Choose Axis Angle.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-27
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
The cue prompts you to Enter Direction - Select object or enter I,J,K values to define vector
Select the Datum Axis and choose OK.
A dialog box displays fields for the Start Angle, End Angle, and Offsets.
Key in the following: Start Angle . . . End Angle . . . . First Offset . . . . Second Offset .
0 360 0 0
Choose OK.
A solid revolved body has been created from an open section string. Remember, if a solid body is desired through a sweep of less than 360° the section string must be closed, or an open section string may be revolved with offsets to form a solid shell using any angle values.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Shade the part to check the shape of the solid body.
Step 3 Revolve a closed section string with an Offset. Now use the same section string as before to create a new revolved body using an offset and an angle to form a shell.
14-28
Choose Cancel and then Undo (third mouse button popĆup).
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose Revolve.
Select the section string again and confirm the selection.
Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution.
Select the Datum Axis and choose OK.
Key in the following: Start Angle . . . End Angle . . . . First Offset . . . . Second Offset .
0 180 0 .25
Choose OK.
Plane of curves
Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and revolves in a CCW direction with respect to the positive axis of rotation. (Datum Axis). The Right Hand Rule for Positive Rotation applies. Step 4 Revolve a solid face using Axis and Angle option. Now close one end of the solid without creating any new section string geometry by revolving an existing face. The cue line should still be prompting to Select section string.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-29
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose Solid Face from the dialog box.
Select the solid face as shown and confirm the selection.
Choose OK twice.
Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution.
Choose XC Axis and choose OK.
Select the far end point of the edge, as shown below, as the rotation point.
Key in the following:
Select this face
Select left end of the top linear edge of the selected face
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Start Angle . . . End Angle . . . . First Offset . . . . Second Offset .
14-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
0 -90 0 0
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose OK.
The cue line prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box that is to be performed with the revolved feature.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the target and tool solids as shown below.
Target solid Tool solid
Choose OK.
The model should now appear as shown with one end enclosed.
Optional Challenge - This shell is one of two molded parts that must fit together. Add a lip to the outside edge of the part by extending the outside edges of the top planar face with an offset value and height value equal to half the shell thickness.
Step 5 Close the part do not save.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-31
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application.
Step 2 Create a body of revolution.
Make layer 44 selectable and all other layers invisible. Layer 1 will remain the work layer.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Generator geometry.
Feature to be created.
14-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose Insert"Form Feature"Revolve.
Select section string as shown below and choose OK.
Section String
Choose Axis Angle.
Define the axis direction by choosing ZC Axis and choose OK.
Choose Reset and OK to define the revolution point.
Key in the following: Start Angle . . . End Angle . . . . First Offset . . . . Second Offset .
0 360 0 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.
Select the main body as the target body.
Select the last feature created as the tool body.
Choose OK.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Save the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-33
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Trimming Face Options When using the Trim to Face/Plane or Trim Between Two Faces/Plane options, the following dialog will appear. This dialog controls how the trimming face/plane will interact with the cross section string.
Do not Extend Trim Face option will only allow the operation to succeed if the cross section geometry or a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane. If only a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane, it must be the portion that the boolean operation effects. Extend Trim Face option extends the face/Plane infinitely.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
14-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face In this activity you will revolve a small area on the top of the face shown below, to create a curved open shape on the top edge of the bracket.
Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_2. Step 2 Create the Body of Revolution.
Choose Revolve.
Remember, a section string may be composed of any combination of solid faces, solid edges, curves, or sheet bodies by selecting it in the graphics area. Filtering for specific object types may be accomplished by choosing an option from the dialog box.
Choose Solid Edge to filter for solid edges.
For the first part of the section string, select the front top edge of the solid and, if necessary, confirm the selection. Select this edge.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-35
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
The entire edge will highlight.
Select the other two edges as indicated below, confirming the selections if necessary. Select these two edges.
Choose OK to complete the edge selection, resetting the filter to all types.
Without filtering, select the orange line, confirming it if necessary. Select this line.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK to confirm that all objects have been selected for the section string.
The Cue line prompts to Define Region Point for Cut Section. The region (area) to be revolved must be specified.
14-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Select the region surrounded by the highlighted objects. Select region
The rectangular region will highlight in a cyan color. The Cue prompts to Choose revolution method.
Choose the Trim To Face option.
Now the defined region may be revolved and trimmed to a specified face.
Filter for Solid Face and choose the solid face as shown, choose OK. Select face
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
A datum axis has been created to use as the axis of rotation.
Choose the Datum Axis and then choose OK.
Ensure that the both Offset values are set to 0 and choose OK on the Revolved Body dialog box to create the revolution without offsets.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-37
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
The rotation will occur around the specified axis. The Cue prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box (Unite, Subtract,Intersect).
Choose Unite to unite the revolved feature to the solid model.
Fit the view.
Step 3 Close the part, do not save.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
14-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application.
Step 2 Extrude a section string to a face.
Make layer 45 the work layer, layer 1 selectable, and all other layers invisible. Generator geometry.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Extrude.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-39
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Select the section string as shown below and choose OK.
Section String
Choose Trim to Face/Plane.
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.
Toggle Do not Extend Trim Face on.
Select the shaded face shown below.
Select this face.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Key in the following: First Offset . . . . 0 Second Offset . 0 aper Angle . . . . 0
14-40
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Choose Subtract.
Choose Cancel.
Step 3 Save and close the part.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
14-41
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
SUMMARY
Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch curves, solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies. Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. In this lesson you:
Extruded a body.
Extruded with offsets.
Extruded to a face.
Created a Body of Revolution.
Created a Swept Feature Along a Guide.
Applied boolean operations.
ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
14-42
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Editing the Model Lesson 15
PURPOSE
To manipulate solid body features by editing their parameters.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Playback the construction of a model.
Edit feature parameters during playback.
Move a Feature.
Delete a Feature.
Edit a feature's parameters and position.
Suppress a feature.
Unsuppress a feature.
Rename a feature.
Reattach a feature to a different face.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-1
Editing the Model
Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu The Edit pullĆdown menu offers common choices that relate to changing existing solid bodies and features. Some of the Edit options are outside the scope of this class. Those that are within the scope are documented here.
Edit Feature Toolbar
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
All icons not shown
15-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Delayed Update on Edit When enabled, the Delayed Update on Edit option allows the user to control when the system performs the display updates based on the edits performed. This option is a toggle between ON and OFF.
Delayed Update on Edit
If Delayed Update on Edit is OFF, the part is updated after the completion of each edit function. Off is the default setting. If Delayed Update on Edit is ON, feature updates are delayed while edits are made. For example, a feature move, followed by an edit to another feature may be accomplished without updating the model until after both edits are complete. This saves time on complex models with many features. NOTE: Delayed Update on Edit may not be used to delay a delete, suppress or unsuppress feature operation.
Update This option allows the user to control when the solid model is recalculated and the display updated with the edits previously made when Delayed Update on Edit is enabled.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-3
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Editing the Model
To view the effects of edits on the model, choose the Update icon in the Edit Feature toolbar or Edit"Update in the Menu bar and the feature updates are performed. The Status Line tracks and reports the update activity. NOTE: The system will automatically update the model when the part file is saved.
Update
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Editing Features Using the Edit Feature toolbar or the Edit→Feature option allows existing solid bodies and features to be altered and manipulated while maintaining any implied or predefined associativity.
Edit Feature Toolbar
Edit Parameters
Edit Move Positioning Feature
Suppress
Unsuppress
Playback
All icons not shown
Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-5
Editing the Model
Suppress The Suppress Feature option simulates the temporary removal of one or more features from the solid body and its display.
After the Suppress Feature icon is selected, a list of all features is displayed in the Suppress Feature dialog box. Select the feature(s) to be suppressed then choose Apply or OK. Suppressed features still actually exist within the math model, but are temporarily removed from the model and display. Since the suppressed features still exist, their display may be restored using Unsuppress Feature. Suppressing features facilitates:
Temporary reduction in the size of the model, making it easier to work with. This speeds up the creation, object selection, edit, and display time.
The removal of nonĆcritical features, such as small holes and blends, from the model for other applications.
Creation of features in locations where conflicting geometry exists. For example: if there is a need to position a feature using an edge that has already been blended, the blend need not be deleted. Suppress the blend, create and position the new feature, and then unsuppress the blend.
When a feature that has associated features is suppressed, the associated features are also suppressed.
Unsuppress This option restores previously suppressed features.
After the Unsuppress Feature icon is selected, a list of all suppressed features is displayed in the Unsuppress Feature dialog box. Select the feature(s) to be unsuppressed then choose Apply or OK. When features are unsuppressed, other features may also be unsuppressed by association.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Move Choosing Move Feature allows a feature that is not associatively positioned to be moved to a new position. This option excludes all extruded and revolved features as well as features whose location has been constrained using positioning dimensions. Features whose position is determined via associative positioning methods must be moved using the Edit"Feature"Positioning option.
When you select the Move Feature icon , the Move Feature dialog box will appear. Once you select a feature, a second Move Feature dialog box will present four methods available to move the feature:
Delta XC, YC, ZC
To a Point
Rotate Between Two Axes
CSYS to CSYS
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-7
Editing the Model
Delta X, Y, Z This option allows the feature to be moved by specifying a distance and direction using rectangular coordinates, based upon the Work Coordinate System. (Delta XC, Delta YC, and Delta ZC)
To a Point This option allows the feature to be moved from a reference point to a destination point. The Point Constructor will become available during the operation to assist in the move.
Rotate Between Two Axes This option allows the selected feature to be moved by rotating that feature from a reference axis to a destination axis. The figure below is an example of this, where the negative X axis is the Reference axis and the negative Y axis is the Destination axis. Reference axis
ZC YC XC
Destination axis
Before
After
CSYS to CSYS
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
This option allows the selected feature to be repositioned from its current coordinate system to the desired coordinate system. The current or Reference Coordinate System must be defined as well as the desired or Destination Coordinate System using the Coordinate System Subfunction dialog.
15-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The newly relocated feature will maintain the same relative position to the Destination Coordinate System as it had with the Reference Coordinate System.
Deleting Features Deleting features is accomplished through the use of the Delete icon in the Standard toolbar or Edit"Delete from the Menu bar. Selecting the delete icon introduces the Class Selection dialog box. Selecting the Features button within the Class Selection dialog box option allows the selection of features of a solid model to be deleted.
Allows the selection of Features
When a feature is deleted from a body, the space it occupied or voided is filled in exactly as it was before the feature was created. If a feature is mistakenly deleted, the Undo function may be used immediately after the deletion to restore the feature.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
NOTE: Any features whose placement, not position, is dependent on the deleted feature will also be deleted. For example, if a hole has been created using a datum plane for its placement face, and the datum plane is deleted, the hole will also be deleted.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-9
Editing the Model
Playback Playback allows the creation of the model to be reviewed feature by feature. The model may also be edited as it is reviewed. When the Playback Feature icon is chosen, the Edit during Update dialog appears and starts with the first feature created.
Features may be browsed through forward or backward. Once the intended feature has been reached, its defining parameters may be interrogated or edited. Once a feature has been dealt with, a different feature may be browsed to. At any time a trigger may be set to update the model starting at the current feature and continuing until the model is complete, or until a feature fails to update.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The Message window shows any applicable error or warning messages, as well as whether the current feature updated successfully or failed.
15-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Show Failure Area temporarily displays failed geometry. This option is available only if an object involved in the failure, such as a tool body, is available for display. Show Current Model displays the part of the model that has been successfully rebuilt. NOTE: Some features, such as instances in an array, may not appear in the current model until the last related feature is rebuilt. NOTE: Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited. The Post Recovery Update Status options specify what should happen when the icon option chosen is completed.
Continue restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.
Pause lets the user choose other Edit during Update options, rather than automatically resuming update.
The Edit during Update dialog also contains icons for the review and edit options that are available for the model. The first row of icons always appear, but are grayed out if not applicable. The remaining icons may or may not appear depending on the circumstances.
Update Tool Should the model fail to update after an edit, the Edit during Update dialog will be presented. The possible options are:
began.
Undo undoes the last modification made to the model before updating
Step Back To allows backward navigation through the model to a selected feature that may be chosen from the Update Selection dialog. (The dialog contains a list of the features created before the current one, in order of creation.)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-11
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Editing the Model
Step Back allows backward navigation through the model one feature at a time.
Step advances one feature at a time through the model.
Step To allows forward navigation through the model to a selected feature. In this case, the Update Selection dialog lists the features that have not yet been rebuilt.
Continue triggers the update process, which continues until the model is completely rebuilt or until a feature fails. If Continue is chosen when a failure occurs, that feature is skipped.
Accept is used to acknowledge a single warning message about a failed feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue. The feature that fails is marked out of date". The status of features may be viewed by choosing Information"Feature" Update Status Report, listing out of date" features with either update or dependant failure reasons. Editing the failed feature to resolve the problem automatically removes the out of date" mark from the Update Status Report.
Accept Remaining, similar to accept, is used to acknowledge multiple warning messages about failed features to allow the update to continue. This is useful for messages that will recur, or to ignore a number of messages.
Delete allows deletion the of the feature that failed to update.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Suppress suppresses the feature currently being updated.
15-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Suppress Remaining suppresses the feature currently being updated and all subsequent features.
Review the model allows investigation, but not editing, of the rebuilt model with options from the menu bar or the third mouse button popĆup menu. (The options available are the same as those in the Gateway application.) Review the model cannot be used to review features that failed during update or that have not yet been rebuilt.
Edit allows you to change the parameters of the feature currently being updated. A subĆmenu will display with the Edit Parameters, Remove Unused References and Edit Position options.
Edit Parameters
Removed Unused References
Edit Position
Edit Parameters allows modification of the parameters of the feature currently being updated. See the Edit Parameters section of this lesson for more information about this option.
Edit Position allows the selected or failed feature to be repositioned. See the Edit Positioning section of this lesson for more details about repositioning features. NOTE: An editing option must be selected before any work may be performed outside the Edit during Update dialog.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-13
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Editing the Model
If a failure occurs, the options that allow advance through the model (Step, Step To, and Continue) are grayed out until the failure is resolved and the feature successfully updates. NOTE: Edits are not permanent until the model is completely rebuilt. If a feature is edited, and then rethought, making it necessary to return to the beginning of that feature's rebuilding, or to the rebuilding of an earlier feature, the edits will be lost. This may happen if Undo, Step Back, Step Back To, Edit Parameters, or Edit Positioning Dimension is chosen on the same or an earlier feature. When Playback is chosen, all of the solids in the model that will be updated disappear from the graphic window. If Step is chosen to reĆcreate the model one feature at a time, the display updates each time a feature is rebuilt. The display does not update if other options such as Step Back To, Step Back, Go To, or Continue are chosen. If these options are being used, and it is desirable to see what the model looks like at this stage of its rebuilding, choose Show Current Model. NOTE: For performance reasons, the display does not change during update when an update method other than Show Current Model is used. After the model update has finished, the display is updated.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a feature for modification or the extraction of data is required. This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach, where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Features option.
Select Features
Depending on which category the user has selected, the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.
Features
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.
Reset All icons not shown
EDS All Rights Reserved
Select All
Deselect All
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Up One Level
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-15
Editing the Model
Once an object has been selected, mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialogs to appear.
Various Feature options
Sketch options
NOTE: selected.
Options may vary based upon application and feature
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features In this activity, the Playback function will be used to gain an understanding of how a model was constructed. The skills required to move a feature that is not located by positioning dimensions will also be demonstrated. Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_1 and start the Modeling application.
Step 2 Review the model construction.
Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar.
from the Edit
All of the solid features are suppressed except the base solid feature which is BLOCK(2).
Step 3 Move forward to the next feature.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Choose the Step icon.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-17
Editing the Model
The next solid feature, EXTRUDED(3), is updated.
Step 4 Examine the extruded feature. The next set of actions will demonstrate how a feature may be examined to see how it was constructed.
Choose the Edit icon box.
in the Edit during Update dialog
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.
The EXTRUDED(3) feature is highlighted in the graphic window because it is the current feature.
Choose Feature Parameters.
Examine the dialog box window and the graphic window to see that the edge of the BLOCK(2) feature, where the arrows begin, was extruded with an offset value to create this feature. Each solid feature may be examined in a similar manner as it is updated.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
15-18
Choose Back twice and then Cancel to return to the Edit During Update dialog.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The defining parameters of the feature could also have been redefined using this option. Step 5 Move forward to the next feature.
Choose the Step icon.
The next feature, T_SLOT(4), is updated.
Try to Fit the view using the Fit icon toolbar.
in the View
Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited. The next action will allow the graphic window to be refreshed.
Choose the Review the model icon.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-19
Editing the Model
Fit the view using the Fit icon.
Review the model allows view options to be accessed during the review/edit process.
Choose OK.
Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated.
Step 6 Move a feature relative to the WCS. The pad illustrated below is a form feature that was not located with positioning dimensions. The pad will be moved using the Move Feature function.
Non-Positioned Pad
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Z X Y
15-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose the Move Feature icon toolbar.
from the Edit Feature
The dialog box window shows a partial list of the features of the model. BLOCK(2) is the base solid on which all of the other features are constructed. RECTANGULAR_PAD(12) is a feature located without positioning dimensions. All of the other features of the model are located associatively to the model using positioning dimensions and therefore not eligible for the Move Feature option, and not listed.
Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).
Choose OK.
Enter the following parameters:
DXC =
.75
DYC =
-.5
DZC =
0
Choose OK.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-21
Editing the Model
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved a distance of .75 in the positive X direction of the WCS and .5 in the negative Y direction of the WCS. Step 7 Rotate a feature Between Two Axes.
Choose the Move Feature icon again.
Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).
Choose OK.
Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.
The Cue Line is prompting you to define a pivot point. Select the Mid Point of the Rectangular Pad edge as shown below.
Z X Y Mid Point
Choose XC Axis as the reference axis and choose OK.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose YC Axis as the destination axis and choose OK.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is rotated 90° about the specified point from the XC axis toward the YC axis. Step 8 Move a Feature from CSYS to CSYS.
Choose the Move Feature icon again.
Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).
Choose OK.
Choose Csys to Csys.
Choose the X Axis, Y Axis icon.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-23
Editing the Model
Select the edges as illustrated below to define the X axis and Y axis of the Reference coordinate system.
Select X-Axis Here
Z X Y Select Y-Axis Here
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Choose OK.
Choose the Offset from CSYS icon as the method to define the Destination coordinate system.
Select the yellow Existing Coordinate System at its origin.
Choose OK.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved such that its relationship to the Reference coordinate system is maintained relative to the Destination coordinate system
15-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Step 9 Delete a Feature using the Object/Action approach.
Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON.
turned
Select Features
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad that was just moved and confirm if necessary.
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Delete from the Pop-Up window.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-25
Editing the Model
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is removed from the model. Step 10 Do not save or close the part.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Parameters This option allows the redefinition of the parameter values of any parametric feature and causes the model to update to reflect the new values. To edit a feature's parameters:
Choose the Edit Parameters icon from the Menu bar.
or Edit"Feature"Parameters
Select the feature from the graphic area or choose the feature name from the list in the Edit Parameters list dialog box and choose OK to confirm the selection.
The Edit Parameters dialog box listing the different types of parameters valid for the selected feature is presented.
Some parameters which may be edited will display on the screen where they can be selected and edited directly, or . . .
Any of the valid parameter types may be selected from the Edit Parameters dialog box to display the original creation dialog box with the current parameter values.
Parameters may be edited in the creation dialog boxes.
Choose OK to complete editing at each of the creation dialog boxes.
Choose OK to complete the feature edit.
Choose OK again to complete the model edit.
NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit parameters using MB3.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-27
Editing the Model
Positioning This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions. In addition, this option allows the addition of positioning dimensions to features that are either underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time of creation. Once the feature to edit has been selected, the system will offer the following option choices based upon the positioning status of the selected feature.
NOTE: If the selected feature has no positioning dimension associated with it, the Add Dimension option is automatically selected. To edit a feature's positioning:
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Choose the Edit Positioning icon from the Menu bar.
or Edit"Feature"Positioning
Select the feature to be edited.
Choose the type of dimension edit (add, edit, or delete) as required.
Select the dimension or dimension type.
Complete the edit, then choose OK.
NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit positioning using MB3.
15-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Add Dimension This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature. When adding positioning dimensions, any object that is the intersection between the feature being positioned and the target solid's face may not be selected as the dimensioning geometry. Select feature to be positioned
This curve is the intersection between the feature and the target solid.
Target solid
The intersection curve is a child product of the tool and target solid's face, it is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being created. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the feature has been defined. Therefore, the intersection curve is not a valid selection to specify location. When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru hole, no edge will be selectable as the target edge because both edges are intersection curves. Identify Solid Face may be used to position to the center of the cylinder.
Target solid
Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-29
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Editing the Model
For example, in the figure below the features are numbered in the order in which they were created. Feature #2 may not be positioned using any face or edge from feature #3. 2
3
1
Edit Dimension Value Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature's positioning dimensions. To use this option:
Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it is selected automatically).
Enter the new value.
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired dimension values have been edited, choose OK.
Delete Dimension Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated to the model.
Error Messages
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
If the new location of the feature causes it to miss the target solid, the Edit during Update dialog box will be presented, this dialog box provides several options for dealing with the failed update as discussed in the Playback section.
15-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions In this activity, you will edit the creation parameters of a feature and then capture one aspect of the design intent by editing a feature's positioning dimensions to be associative to the creation parameters of another feature. Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.
Choose BLOCK(2).
Choose OK.
The parametric values for the block are displayed on the graphic window. A parameter may be chosen by selecting an expression in the graphic screen or by choosing Feature Dialog. Also, note the expression that controls the width, p8=3.120; this will be used in the next few steps.
Choose Feature Dialog from the Edit Parameters dialog box.
Change the X Length to 2.75.
Choose MB2 to approve the parameter change.
Choose MB2 again to approve the change to the indicated feature.
Choose MB2 a final time to approve the change to the model.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-31
Editing the Model
Notice that after the part updated, the pad on the bottom is no longer in the center. Assume that the design intent is that the pad should always remain in the center of the part. This situation will be remedied in the next step.
Z
Z Y
Before
X
Y
X
After
Step 2 Edit the Pad's Positioning Dimensions using the Object/Action approach.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON.
turned
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad shown in the above figure and accept if necessary. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7))
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Edit Positioning from the Pop-Up window.
The positioning dimensions for the feature are displayed in the graphic window.
15-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
In the graphic screen select the p39=1.560 expression. To see the pad feature and expressions better, the view may need to be rotated and updated (MB3). Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part, entering a simple equation will capture this aspect of the design intent.
Enter p8/2. The expression p8 controls the width of the part.
Choose MB2 to approve the dimension edit.
Choose MB2 again to signify the end of dimension editing for this feature.
Choose MB2 again to signify the end of positioning editing for this feature.
Choose MB2 a final time to signify the end of positioning editing for the model. At this point another feature could have been selected for editing.
The part should update and the pad is now located in the center of the block.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-33
Editing the Model
Step 3 Edit the Block Width using the Object/Action approach.
In the graphic window select the base block feature as shown in the figure below. You will need to wait for the ellipsis (+...) to appear, then select with MB1 and use Quick Pick to step through the multiple candidates. Watch the Status line, when it reads BLOCK(2), accept the feature with MB2.
Place cursor here and wait for the ellipsis to appear (+...).
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.
Select the p8=2.75 dimension from the graphic window.
Change the value to 5.00 .
Choose MB2 twice to complete the edit.
Choose the Fit icon.
Notice that the pad feature remained in the center of the block.
15-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool In this activity, you will edit a feature that causes a feature to be positioned completely outside the target body. Using Edit during Update, you will rectify the problem and continue the modeling process. Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.
Choose BLOCK(2) and select MB2.
Select the p8=5.00 dimension from the graphic window.
Change the value to 1.75 .
Choose MB2 three times to complete the edit.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-35
Editing the Model
The Edit during Update dialog box appears.
The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the graphic window.
Choose Show Current Model.
The model appears in the graphic window relative to the new 1.75 width value.
Choose Show Failure Area.
The reason for the failure may now be clearly seen; the hole falls outside the bounds of the body.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-36
Choose the Edit icon window
Choose the Edit Position icon.
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
in the Edit During Update
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Select the p45=1.625 dimension from the graphic window.
Enter p8-1 and choose MB2 four times.
The hole now falls within the solid model, correcting the failure. The model updates correctly. Step 2 Close the part, do not save.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-37
Editing the Model
Model Navigator The Model Navigator is a special window that allows investigation of, as well as actions to be performed on a feature. Holding down the third mouse button on a feature causes a feature specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar. Both, by default, are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window.
UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar
Windows: Icon from Resource Bar
The options on the popĆup menu may vary depending on what feature is selected, and what operation may be pending at the time. Also, most of the options are not available if the Modeling application is not active.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The following options appear on this popĆup menu for Feature nodes:
Display Dimensions
Show/Hide
Select
Make Current Feature
Edit Parameters
Edit Positioning
Suppress/Unsuppress
Reorder Before
Reorder After
Group
Replace
Rename
Delete
Object Dependency Browser
Information
Properties
The following options appear on the popĆup menu for Work Part nodes:
Expand/Collapse All (with Quick Look listing only)
List Interpart Children
List Interpart Parents
Work Part nodes are not discussed in this text. For more information about these topics consult the technical documentation.
Display Dimensions
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature's parameter values to be displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display remains until a Refresh is done.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-39
Editing the Model
Show/Hide Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed. This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought back by using the Show/Hide options or by using the blanking functions found under the Edit"Blank options in the Menu bar. The Hide Body option blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to. The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If the Hide Parents option is used on a swept feature, the system will hide (blank) the parent curves which generated the swept feature. If the swept feature is derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the parent solid body. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting curves," which are produced directly from a curve feature operation, such as with Offset Curve.
Select Allows the parents or children of a feature to be selected in the Model Navigator. This option also allows for all descendants/ancestors to be selected. For example, if a pad feature is placed on a block feature, the pad is a child of the block. If a hole is placed on the pad feature, then the hole becomes a direct child to the pad, however the hole is also a descendant of the block. The ancestors of the hole are the pad and the block features.
Make Current Feature Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. This option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the solid body, and then add more features at that point in the model hierarchy. If this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of the build hierarchy, making it the current feature, all of the features after it are marked inactive. As new features are created they are inserted into the build hierarchy before the inactive features.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
NOTE: If feature creation is not currently applicable, such as from the Gateway application, the Make Current Feature option is unavailable.
15-40
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
NOTE: When a pre-V16 part file is loaded, the last feature in that part is the current feature.
Edit Parameters Same as Edit Parameters as discussed previously in this lesson. Double clicking on a feature name in the Model Navigator will bring up the Edit Parameters dialog box.
Edit Positioning Same as Edit Positioning as discussed previously in this lesson.
Suppress and Unsuppress Feature Choosing Suppress causes the feature to be suppressed and an immediate update to the model to be performed. Suppress works with the checkbox associated with the feature node. When the feature is suppressed, the check is removed from the checkbox. When the feature is unsuppressed the check is displayed in the checkbox. The option on the popĆup menu changes to Unsuppress, which may be used to unsuppress the feature.
Reorder Before/After Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build hierarchy. Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered relative to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus. Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Model Navigator window to perform a feature reorder. Multiple features may be selected by holding the Ctrl key down during selection.
Group
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Same as Format"Group Features (see technical documentation for more information).
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-41
Editing the Model
This option lets you group features into a special collection called a Feature Set. Members of a Feature Set can be controlled together during suppress, delete and move feature operations. Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog box to appear. The features included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the Model Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name. NOTE: If you delete a Feature Set, all of its member features are also deleted. To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members, first remove its members.
Replace The replace option allows a feature's definition to be replaced or redefined" by another feature. For example, a surface that is used as a trim face could be replaced for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several other features. For more information on replace see the technical documentation.
Rename Features are named by the system on creation, such as BLOCK(1). The rename option allows userĆdefined names to be assigned in place of the system assigned names.
Delete Same as Edit→Delete as discussed previously in this lesson.
Object Dependency Browser The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of a feature to be interrogated.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Information Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window.
15-42
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Properties The properties option provides access to General and Attribute information for the feature selected. General properties include the feature name, which can be edited similarly to the Rename function. Attributes can be added to any feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column of the Model Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Model Navigator columns see the technical documentation.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-43
Editing the Model
Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator This activity will show how reordering a feature impacts the design of the part. Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_2 and start the Modeling application. Step 2 See how the part was constructed. Another way of reviewing the construction of a model, is by suppressing all the features and then unsuppressing each feature one at a time.
Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required.
Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator.
Click on the checkmark to the left of BLOCK(0).
The block feature is suppressed as well as all of the other features. This is because the subsequent features possess a child relationship to the block.
In the Model Navigator, unsuppress each feature by clicking in the checkbox to restore the display. Start with BLOCK(0) and work down.
This should afford a better understanding of how the part was constructed. Step 3 Reorder the Hollow feature.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-44
Select the Hollow feature in the Model Navigator.
Place the cursor over the node for HOLLOW(1), press and hold down MB1, drag the feature on top of EXTRUDED(3).
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The hollow feature is reordered after the extruded feature and the graphic window reflects the edit.
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(2) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(5).
Notice the sharp corners on the inside radii.
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(5) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(6).
Now there is a radius on the inside corners. Step 4 Identify and Rename a Feature.
Select the node name BLEND(4) using the first mouse button.
The corresponding feature highlights in the graphic window. Since the feature has been identified, it can now be renamed with a description that is more meaningful to the user.
Place the cursor over the node name BLEND(4), use the third mouse button popĆup menu to choose Rename.
The Rename dialog box appears.
Enter THROAT_BLEND and press Enter.
The new name is reflected in the Model Navigator. Notice that the time stamp [(4)] was added.
Close the Model Navigator Window. (Windows users remember the tack)
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-45
Editing the Model
Reattaching a Feature One of the feature parameters available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach. Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined. A feature reference may be an attachment face, a thru face, an edge, etc. Objects that may have their references redefined include most features (holes, pockets, grooves, pads, slots, and bosses), and linear instance sets of these features, trim faces of extruded and revolved features, and userĆdefined features (UDFs). In the figure below, a slot feature is reattached from the original placement face to a new face. Original slot feature
Slot feature is reattached to a new placement face
Using the Reattach Menu dialog box The Reattach Menu dialog box only enables the options pertaining to redefining the selected feature. For example, the model must include a thru feature for either of the Specify Thru Face options to be enabled, or include a UDF for the Specify Tool Placement Face option to be enabled.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-46
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
When an option icon is chosen, the system highlights the existing references of the type in question. For example, if the Specify First Thru Face icon is chosen, the system highlights the current thru face for the selected feature.
Current positioning dimensions
Reference direction type Use to change direction of the normal direction
Use to change reference direction
Specify location of feature
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-47
Editing the Model
Reattach Menu dialog box Options The following options are available to redefine feature references: Specify Target Placement Face allows a new attachment face for the feature being edited to be specified. Specify Reference Direction allows a new horizontal reference to be specified for the feature being edited. Redefine Positioning Dimensions allows new positioning dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited. Specify First Thru Face allows the first through/trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined. Specify Second Thru Face allows the second through/ trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined. Specify Tool Placement Face allows the tool face of a User Defined Feature (UDF) to be redefined. In addition, while using any of these redefine feature options, the following options on the Reattach Menu dialog box are available: Filter allows filtering of selectable object types. The default is All Types. The following object types are available:
All Types
Face
Datum Plane
Edge
Datum Axis
The above list of filter options is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen. For example, for Specify Target Placement Face, Specify First Thru Face, Specify Second Thru Face, and Specify Tool Placement Face, only faces and datum planes are selectable. For Specify Horizontal Reference, faces, edges, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-48
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
A list window displays the types of positioning dimensions currently on the selected feature. If the first mouse button is used to select a dimension in this list, its available references are highlighted in the graphic window. DoubleĆclicking with the first mouse button on a dimension in the list allows it to be redefined. The Direction Reference options, Horizontal and Vertical, allow the definition of a new horizontal or vertical feature reference. The default is always set for the existing reference type. Reverse Direction allows the feature's reference direction to be reversed. Reverse Side allows the feature's normal direction to be reversed when reattaching that feature to a datum plane. Specify Origin allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by moving it to a specified origin. This option is useful when reattaching features to datum planes. Since features are initially placed at the center of a plane, the update may fail since the plane's center may not be near the feature's actual position. This option may be used with all features. Delete Positioning Dimension allows deletion of a selected positioning dimension. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions, this option is grayed out.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-49
Editing the Model
Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature In this activity, you will move a feature from one face to another.
Step 1 Open the part file pau_reattach_1 and start the Modeling application. Step 2 Reattach the extruded feature.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
In the graphic window select the rectangular pad and accept if necessary. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7))
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.
Choose Reattach from the Edit Parameters dialog box.
A Reattach dialog box displays icons for the selection steps and other options for reattaching the feature.
15-50
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
The icon for Specify Target Placement Face is highlighted. Also, notice that the current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is highlighted in the graphic window. The Cue Line prompts to select a Target face to define the new placement face for the feature.
Select the right face of the solid, and accept the selection.
Now the second icon, Specify Reference Direction highlights, the current horizontal reference vector is displayed in the graphic window, and the cue prompts you for selection of a new horizontal reference.
Select the lower edge of the face as the horizontal reference, and accept the selection.
Target Face
Horizontal Reference
Now the third icon, Redefine Positioning Dimensions, highlights and the Cue Line prompts you to select a Dimension to Redefine.
Select the vertical positioning dimension (2.500).
Choose the lower front edge of the solid as the target object as shown below.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-51
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Editing the Model
Select the bottom outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge.
Tool edge
Target object
Select the horizontal positioning dimension (1.000).
Select the right vertical edge of the solid as the Target Object as shown below.
Select the right outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge.
Tool edge Target Object
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-52
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Editing the Model
Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the feature.
Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
15-53
Editing the Model
SUMMARY
The Edit Features functions in Unigraphics provides an efficient and robust capability to change design, form, fit, and function. Because parametric values can be accessed and edited, investment of parametric design time is not wasted when the need for design changes occur. The good designer will possess good modeling skills that keep in mind downstream editing requirements. This lesson introduced:
Delayed Update on Edit
Suppress a Feature
Unsuppress a Feature
Move a Feature
Delete a Feature
Use the Playback Function
Edit Feature Parameters
Edit Feature Positioning
Edit During Edit
The Model Navigator
Reattach a Feature to a Different Face
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-54
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Arrays Lesson 16
PURPOSE
To introduce Instance Arrays.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a Rectangular Array.
Create a Circular Array.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-1
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Using Insert"Feature Operation"Instance from the main menu bar, duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models.
Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Instance yields the following dialog box which supports Rectangular and Circular Instance Arrays as well as the ability to Mirror Features or Mirror an entire solid Body.
16-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Instance This option allows Instance arrays from an existing feature to be created. An instance is a shape linked feature, similar to a copy. The Instance not only duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature. Since all instances of a feature are associated, the parameters of the feature may be edited and those changes are reflected in every instance of the feature. The instance itself is also a parametric feature; that is, the parameters of the Instance Array itself may be edited. The following Instance options are available:
Rectangular
Circular
Mirror Body (Not covered in this course)
Mirror Feature (Not covered in this course)
Pattern Face (Not covered in this course)
There are three methods of creating Instance arrays:
General
Simple
Identical
In most cases the General method is the best practice. However, in very complex models, system performance may be affected. In these cases, using the Simple method may increase performance and in a worst case scenario the Identical method may be required. NOTE:
Most Feature Operations may not be instanced.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Rectangular Instance Array This function allows the creation of a linear array of instances from the selected feature(s). These arrays may be in either the XC or YC direction or both. All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC Ć YC plane. The WCS can be redefined while in the process of creating arrays. The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of the feature that the array is based on. If the feature position is edited, the array position will also update. After the feature(s) to be instanced is selected, the following parameters must be entered:
Number Along XC: The total number of instances in the XC direction, including the original feature to be Instanced.
XC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the XC direction.
Number Along YC: The total number of instances in the YC direction, including the original feature to be Instanced.
YC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the YC direction.
The Offset values can be either positive or negative. The direction will be relative to the current orientation of the WCS. The total Number of Instances for both the XC and YC must be a whole number greater than zero. Parameter Settings: Number Along XC = 3 XC Offset = .75
1.00
Number Along YC =4 YC Offset = 1
Hole selected for Instance
.75
16-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Solid block
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Circular Instance Array Allows a circular array of instances from selected features to be created. After selecting the feature to be instanced in a circular array, the parameters for the circular array must be supplied. Parameters include the method for creating the instance array plus the following values:
Number: The number of instances to be created in the circular array, including the existing feature.
Angle: The angular spacing between instances, about the reference point.
Once the feature is selected and the parameters specified, a rotation axis must be selected. The plane in which the circular instance array will be created will be normal to this rotation axis, regardless of WCS orientation. A rotation axis may be defined by specifying a Point & Direction (Vector Constructor dialog box) or by specifying a Datum Axis. NOTE: Defining a point and direction will not maintain positional associativity. If the defined point moves, the circular array will not move with it. Defining the rotation axis by a datum axis will maintain positional associativity. Using Point & Direction, after specifying the rotation axis, the following information must be entered: Reference Point: Defines the location that the instanced feature will be rotated about, relative to the rotation axis.
Rotation axis +ZC
Hole selected for instance array
Reference point Y
Z
45 Parameter Settings:
X
EDS All Rights Reserved
Number
=ĄĄĄ8
Angle
=Ą45
Rotation Axis
=Ą+ZC
Reference Point
= arc center
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array ÏÏÏ In this activity, a rectangular instance array will be created from a hole feature. 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Design Intent The finished part will have six holes. There will be two holes in the XC direction and 3 holes in the YC direction. The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part.
Before
After
Step 1 Open the part file.
16-6
Open pau_array_1, and start the Modeling application.
Save the part as ***_array_1.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 2 Create a hole feature.
Choose Hole.
Use Simple Hole type.
Select that Planar Placement Face and the Thru Face as shown.
Select the outside face as the Planar Placement Face.
Select the inside face as the Thru Face.
Enter .257 as the diameter of the hole and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-7
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Position the hole as shown below.
Step 3 Manipulate the WCS. The WCS must be in the proper orientation in order to create the instance array.
16-8
Choose WCS→Orient.
Choose XĆAxis, YĆAxis.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select the Axes as shown.
Y-Axis
X-Axis
The proper WCS orientation is shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 4 Create a rectangular array of the hole feature.
Choose Instance.
Select Rectangular Array.
Choose the SIMPLE_HOLE(14). The feature may be selected from the graphics area or from the Instance dialog.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-9
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK.
Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below: Method Number Along XC XC Offset Number Along YC YC Offset
General 2 1.25 3 .687
Choose OK.
A temporary display of the instance array will appear in the graphics area. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown in the graphics area. Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog box.
Choose Yes.
Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
16-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array In this activity, a circular instance array will be created from multiple features.
Design Intent The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part. Step 1 Open pau_array_2, and start the Modeling application.
Save the part as ***_array_2. Before
After
Step 2 Create the Instance Feature.
Choose Instance.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-11
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose Circular Array.
Select the following five features from the Instance dialog: EXTRUDED(5) BOSS(6) BOSS(7) EXTRUDED(9) SIMPLE_HOLE(13)
NOTE: Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1, dragging over their names in the Instance dialog box, and releasing MB1.
Choose OK to confirm the selections.
Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below. Method General. Number 3 Angle 120
Choose OK.
The axis of rotation must be selected. Using a Datum Axis maintains positional associativity.
16-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
Make layer 61 selectable.
Select the Datum Axis Method.
Select the Datum Axis as shown.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this Datum Axis
A temporary system display previews the arrangement of the instances to be created. To speed up the display process, only the first feature selected will be previewed.
Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct.
Save the part file.
Step 3 Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature.
Choose the Chamfer.
Choose the Single Offset option.
Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes. Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK.
Key in the Offset value of 1.5 and choose OK.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-13
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Notice that there is a choice to apply the chamfer only to the selected feature or to apply it to all instances.
Choose Chamfer all instances.
Step 4 Edit the Instance array parameters.
16-14
Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Select the first instanced feature from the Feature Selection dialog box list and choose OK.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
All options available for editing the selected feature are displayed in the dialog box that appears. The options in the dialog box may vary depending on which feature is selected.
Choose Instance Array Dialog.
Accept the default Method of General and enter the new parameters: Total Number = 4 Angle = 360/4 Radius = 75
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-15
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose OK three times to complete the edit. The part should now have four legs and appear as shown below.
Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
16-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SUMMARY
The Instance functionality duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models. In this lesson you:
Created a Rectangular Instance Array.
Created a Circular Instance Array.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
16-17
Instance Arrays
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
16-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Additional Projects Appendix A
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-1
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 1 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Project 2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-3
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 3 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-5
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 4 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-7
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
A-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Project 5
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-9
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 6 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-11
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 7 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-13
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 8 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-15
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 9 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-17
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 10 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-18
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-19
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 11 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-20
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-21
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 12 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-22
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-23
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 13 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-24
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-25
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 14 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-27
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 15 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-29
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 16 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-31
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 17 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-33
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ Project 18 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
A-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
A-35
Additional Projects
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
A-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Point Constructor Options Appendix B
This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may be used. The Point Constructor dialog box provides a standard way to specify points throughout Unigraphics. It allows the creation of point objects as well as the determination of locations in threeĆdimensional space.
Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided, icons at the top of the dialog box, or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in the fields provided.
Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations When you choose the Point icon, the Point Constructor lets you create point objects. Points appear on the screen as plus signs (+). When you use the Point Constructor in any other option, you are only specifying temporary locations. These locations are displayed as asterisks (*). Choose Refresh to remove the asterisks.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-1
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Point Constructor Options
Points have many uses in Unigraphics. Points may be used to locate other objects, such as the title block on a drawing. Points may also be used to construct curves or surfaces. Locating positions with the Point Constructor dialog box is also valuable. For example, the end of a line or the center of a circle may be specified to locate objects in model space. The positions of the control points of a curve may also be specified.
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Icon Methods To Specify a Point The top of the Point Constructor dialog box displays icons representing various methods for specifying a point. As the cursor is passed over these icons, the icon block displays the name of the method. The icon methods are described below.
Inferred Point Depending on where you select when using this option, one of the following single selection options will be used: cursor location, existing point, end point, mid point or arc center. This option does not require a selection of the particular point type for each selection.
B-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Cursor Location Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the cross hairs and indicating a location. The location defined lies on the WCS Work plane. To locate points quickly and precisely, use a grid (see Preferences→Work Plane "Show Grid). When Snap to Grid is on, points snap to the nearest grid position. The grid spacing may be set as desired. The spacing in the X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction. For example, if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch (.125), then the grid spacing would be set to .125. A point at exactly one inch in X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in X and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position.
Existing Point Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point. Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to be specified. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object such as a the endpoint of a line, or the location of an object, such as placement of a drawing border.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-3
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Point Constructor Options
End Point Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines, arcs, conics, and splines. Lines Conics
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Arcs Splines
When selecting geometry, place the selection ball near the end point you wish to select. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it was selected (see below). Closed curves, such as complete circles, have only one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location. Selection Position
B-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Control Point Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. The control points, which vary for each object type, include: Existing points, End points of conics, End points and Mid points of open arcs, Center points of circles or arcs, Mid points and End points of lines, and End points or Knot points of splines. Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one control point, place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The system locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected. Open Arcs
Lines
Conics Circles Splines
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-5
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Point Constructor Options
Intersection Point Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. If the curves intersect more than once, the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve was selected. 1
Two Possible Intersections
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Select second curve nearest the intersection you want
2
When the two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane, an apparent intersection occurs and the system creates the point on the first curve selected. The system calculates an apparent intersection by projecting the curve parallel to the ZC axis, and the point will be defined on the first object selected (see below). Projections are always done along the ZC-axis. Second Curve ZC YC
Point
XC First Curve
Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two nonĆparallel curves. Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch (see below).
Intersection point of line and arc
Implied intersection of two lines
B-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by selecting the arc along its circumference.
In the example below, selecting with the circumference of the large circle within the selection ball defines the center point of the large circle.
Selection Point Center Point
Selecting near the center of the large circle (see below) will not select the center of the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the small circle.
Selection Point
Center Point
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-7
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Point Constructor Options
Angle on Arc/Ellipse Use this option to locate a position at an angular location on an arc or an ellipse. Position on Arc
105°
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The angle value is entered in degrees. The angle is referenced from the positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. The angular position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc or ellipse (see below).
Position on Arc
B-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
225°
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Quadrant Point Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse.
Select Here
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Quadrant Point is Located
Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then at quarterĆdistance intervals along the object. The point located is the quadrant point nearest to the position selected. The quadrant position may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc (see below).
Select Here
Quadrant Point is Located
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-9
Point Constructor Options
Choosing a Coordinate System Choose WCS or Absolute to specify which coordinate system the system references when locating positions using the Base Point text entry fields. The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the default. The WCS may be moved to any location and placed in any orientation. The absolute coordinate system is a fixed coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Offset This option allows the specification of a position in model space offset from a reference position in model space. The offset location may be specified relative to the reference position using either the absolute or the work coordinate system.
Once an offset method has been specified, it remains in effect until another offset method is selected. The default setting is None (no offset). Offset allows a position to be specified away from a specified reference, or base position in one of the five ways discussed below. This is a useful tool if the desire is to specify many positions where each position is offset from the previous position, or when the position that is being specified is relative to another position most easily defined by selecting a preĆexisting point.
B-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
In the example below, the need is to specify a quick row of points, offset in the X direction and Y direction. The first point could be specified, the offset would be set to rectangular and the values entered, OK could then be chosen a number of times (7) to offset the remaining points from each previous point. Each alternating OK specifies the next base position, then the next offset position based on the values.
Offset 4
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Offset 3 First Point
Offset 2 Offset 1
Exiting the Point Constructor menu when using an offset requires the return of the offset setting to NONE. This may be accomplished by choosing the RESET button, or by manually changing the offset type back. If The NONE setting is not reset, the Point Constructor continues to offset positions from the last specified position.
Reset Use the Reset button to quickly set the X-Y-Z coordinate fields to 0.0, and to set the Offset option to None.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-11
Point Constructor Options
Rectangular Offset This option allows a position to be offset by entering values that represent the X, Y, and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a reference point (see below). The direction of the offset is determined by the coordinate system selected and the orientation of that coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset. Offset
Offset Point
X = 2.0 Y = 0.5 Z = 1.5 Reference Point
Z Y X Coordinate System
B-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Cylindrical Offset This option allows an offset position to be specified by entering cylindrical coordinates (see below). The offset values for Radius, Angle, and DeltaĆZC are defined relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below. The radius and the angle always lie in the XĆY plane of the coordinate system specified. A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or the work coordinate system. Offset
Radius Angle Delta-ZC
Radius
Offset Point
Distance Along ZC-axis (Delta - ZC)
ZC YC XC
Angle Reference Point
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-13
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Point Constructor Options
Spherical Offset This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical coordinates, two angles and a radius (see below). Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane, and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the offset point from the X-Y plane. The radius defines the distance between the base point and the offset point. A spherical offset may reference either the work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system.
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Offset
Offset Point
Radius Angle 1 Angle 2
Radius
Angle 2
Z Y X
Reference Point
Angle 1
Vector Offset This option allows specification of an offset position by indicating a direction and entering a distance in that direction (see below). The direction is defined by selecting a line. The point is offset toward the end of the line that is closest to where the line was selected.
Entered Distance
Offset Point Direction of Offset
Z Y
Reference Point
X
B-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Line Selected Here Line Selected to Define Vector
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Point Constructor Options
Offset Along Curve This option allows an offset position to be defined along a curve by a specified arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length (see below). Note that lines may also be used as the curves" for this offset.
Offset Point
Offset Point
Direction of Offset Reference Point
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Direction of Offset Reference Point
How the curve is selected determines the direction in which the offset will occur. Select the curve away from the reference position on the side of the curve you want to specify the position (see below).
Select Here . . . Reference Point
Select Here . . . For this Offset Direction
For this Offset Direction
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
B-15
Point Constructor Options
ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
B-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Transformations Appendix C
This appendix discusses the fundamentals of transformations. The following topics are covered.
Transformation procedure
Terminology
Translate
Scale
Rotate about a point
Mirror through a line
Rotate about a line
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
There are no activities.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-1
Transformations
Transformations The Edit→Transform option allows objects to be translated, rotated, and scaled. Transformations may be used to create multiple copies of selected objects, make multiple moves, scales, etc.. NOTE: Views, layouts, drawings, or the current WCS are not translatable objects. There are separate options from the main menu bar to deal with these items. Transformation Procedure
Choose Edit→Transform.
Select the objects for transformation. The Class Selection Subfunction dialog box may be used to select the objects.
Choose a transformation type from the dialog box shown below.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
C-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Complete the additional selections and choices from dialog boxes. Then complete the choices on the dialog box shown below, and choose OK.
Transformation Options Terminology Destination Layer allows you to select a layer on which to place the transformed objects. Choose one of the following options:
Work
Places the transformed objects on the current work layer.
Orig
Keeps the transformed objects on their original layer.
Specify
Moves the transformed objects to the specified layer.
Trace Status on creates connecting curves between the original objects end points and their transformed copies. When trace status is off, connecting lines are not created between the original object and the transformed copies.
Original object Transformed Object Trace Curves Before
After
Trace Status may be used with Translate, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, or Reposition to create closed wireframe shapes. Trace Status is not applicable to solid bodies, surfaces, or boundary objects. Trace curves are independent of the Destination Layer setting, and are always created on the current Work layer.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-3
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Transformations
Subdivisions allows the transformation distance to be divided into a number of equal parts. The subdivision factor is equal to the number of these parts. Use Subdivisions to translate, scale via uniform method, or rotate an object. In translation, the distance is divided by the subdivision factor. In rotation, the angle of rotation is divided by the subdivision factor. In scale, the subdivision distance is the nth root of the transformation, where n is equal to the subdivision factor. NOTE: Subdivisions only divides the transformation distance into equal parts. It does not display selected objects at each subdivided segment. After the number of subdivisions has been entered, the Transform Type dialog box redisplays. Multiple Copies may be selected to enter a desired number of copies. Move allows transformation of an object from its original location to a new location. The selection in this option is object based. A feature of a solid body may not be selected for this operation.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
When a solid body is moved, its positioning features and their associated dimensions are moved. All associated datum planes and axes are also moved with their solid body. All sketch features (when sketched on a face or datum plane) are moved with the solid body as well. When a solid body containing swept features is moved, the sweep outlines, or paths, move as well. Other features or solid bodies sharing those sweep outlines are also moved. NOTE: A solid body cannot be moved with the transformation type set to scale. Use the Scale operation to accomplish this. Copy allows an object to be duplicated at a new location, while keeping the original intact in its initial position. Multiple Copies allows duplication of objects a specified number of times during certain transform operations. Undo Last cancels any immediately preceding transform operation. Use Undo Last after a transformation via Move, Copy, or Multiple Copies. Undo Last remains available until you choose Reselect Objects.
C-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Changes in Transform Type, Destination Layer, Trace Curves, or Subdivisions made after a transformation, but before it is undone, occur during the next transformation operation. They will not affect the execution of Undo Last. Objects originally selected for transformation remain selected at the completion of the Undo Last, and ready for the next transformation operation. Move, Copy, or Multiple Copies selected immediately following Undo Last, regenerates the objects in a state that preceded Undo Last.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-5
Transformations
Translate Objects may be Translated (moved) to a point, or by a distance of delta. Translated objects maintain the original orientation.
To a Point allows the selected objects to be translated by indicating a reference and a destination point. Delta allows the selected objects to be translated by specifying a new location in terms of the work (delta XC, delta YC, and delta ZC) coordinates.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
C-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Scale This option affects the size of an object and the distance between the object and its reference point. A nonĆuniform scale method may be specified with the values relative to the WCS..
Scale allows the selected objects to be proportionately resized. Care must be exercised in choosing a reference point for the scale operation because the scale factor is applied to the geometry equally relative to the reference point. The results of different reference point positions are illustrated below. Reference Point
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Reference Point
Reference Point
Reference Point
Scale Factor=1/2
NOTE: A solid body may not be scaled by copying it without losing its parametric information.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-7
Transformations
NonĆUniform Scale allows objects to be resized independently with respect to the XC, YC, and ZC axes. An example of where this option might be useful is to incorporate variable shrinkage factors in mold design.
The figure below illustrates an example of NonĆUniform Scale.
ZC
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ZC YC XC
Before
YC Scale Factors XC Scale = .75 YC Scale = .5 ZC Scale = 1.25
XC After
NOTE: NonĆUniform Scale will not allow a Move operation on a solid body. Use Copy instead. However, analytic face geometry (for example, a block feature) cannot be nonĆuniform scaled via Copy. If you wish to nonĆuniform scale a solid body containing analytic surfaces, first convert those sheet bodies into bĆsurfaces using the Convert function, then sew them together into a new solid body valid for nonĆuniform scaling. With the NonĆUniform Scale method, Undo Last is available even if the rescaled object had been converted to a different kind of object.
C-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
NOTE: Once an arc is converted into a spline, it can no longer be restored to its original object type.(See figure below) Arc
YC
ZC
Spline
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ XC Before
YC
Scale Factors
ZC
XC Scale = 1.35 YC Scale = 1.02 ZC Scale = 1.00
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ XC After
When an object is transformed into a different type, some or all of the original object data may be lost (for example, attributes, view modifications, drafting objects, dimensions, tool paths, and offset sheet bodies). Subdivisions may not be used in NonĆUniform Scale.
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-9
Transformations
Rotate About a Point Use this option to move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis, and passing through a specified reference point. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. After the reference point for rotation has been selected, a rotation and angle dialog box displays.
The figure below illustrates Rotation About a Point, with multiple copies. Original Object
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Number of Copies: 3 Subdiv Factor: 4 Rotation Angle: 270 Reference Point
ZC YC XC Line Parallel To ZC
C-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Mirror Through a Line A mirror image of an object may be created on the opposite side of a reference line. Three options are available for line selection.
The figure below illustrates an example of Mirror Through a Line. Transformed Object
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
YC
ZC
XC
Reference Line
Original Object
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-11
Transformations
Rotate About a Line This option allows objects to be moved around a reference line which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. Three options are available for line selection: Two Points, Existing Line, and Point and Vector. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate About a Line, multiple copies. Original Hole
Reference Point
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Z Y Number Of Copies: 7 Rotation Angle: 315 Reference Point: Arc Center
C-12
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
X
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Transformations
Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry For swept solids using explicit curves that have common geometrical subsets, the use of Mirror Through a Line and Mirror Through a Plane can save users considerable creation time. Consider the example below, which shows a combination of Offset Curves and curves Mirrored Through a Line:
Associative Offset Curves
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
No Associativity
Mirrored Curves
Parent Curves
(Not Mirrored)
TIP
Careful consideration of the curves used as parents for the Offset Curves is necessary. Remember, except for the offset distance, editing of the Offset Curves is accomplished only by editing the parents. The Offset Curves are handled as a complete set. Also, note that the circle and arc at the bottom were not mirrored, but the lines at the top were.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
C-13
Transformations
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
C-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Curve Creation Appendix D
PURPOSE
To introduce Basic Curves.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this appendix, you will be able to:
Create Lines
Create Arcs
Create Circles
Create Fillets
Trim Curves
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-1
Curve Creation
Explicit Curves The intent of this appendix is to teach 2D generator and guide geometry for the purposes of sweeping through space to create solid bodies. NOTE: In Unigraphics, a curve is considered to be a point, line, arc, spline or conic. The Curve creation options are brought up by choosing Insert→Curve.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The Work Coordinate System When creating curves, the orientation or direction can be based on the WCS. The term horizontal appearing in any dialog box or Cue line is meant as parallel to the XCĆaxis, vertical is parallel to the YCĆaxis, and normal is parallel to the ZCĆaxis, regardless of the work view or perspective on the screen. Any 2D curve, except the 2 curve fillet, will be created on the XC-YC plane or a plane parallel to it.
D-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Basic Curves When the Basic Curves icon is chosen, the Basic Curves dialog box is displayed. The icons on this dialog box are displayed below. Circle
Fillet Edit Curve Parameters
Line
Trim
Arc
The portion of the Basic Curves dialog box below the icons is different for each of the options selected. The Basic Curves dialog box is used to create lines, arcs, circles, and fillets. While creating these curves, there is also quick access to the Trim Curve and Edit Curve Parameters functions.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
The Dialog Bar The Dialog Bar is a series of text fields that appear at the bottom of the graphics window when in the Basic Curves function. The text fields in the Dialog Bar will vary depending on which type of curve is being created and which options have been selected. For example, the Dialog Bar below is what will appear when creating lines. The Dialog Bar
Location Fields
Parameter Fields
Location fields - XC, YC, and ZC. These fields track the location of the cursor, or they can be used to input a coordinate location in the WCS.
Parameter fields - These fields control parameters of the curve, such as length of a line, or radius of an arc.
To give a text field focus, the key may be used or click the first mouse button in the fields desired. Select once in the field to insert text in the existing string, or select twice for overstrike mode.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
When the XC, YC, or ZC field has focus, and is pressed, the location specified is accepted and an asterisk will appear in the graphics area indicating that point.
When a parameter field (such as length, radius, etc. - any field other than the three mentioned above) has focus and is pressed, the values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being constructed.
As soon as a line, arc, or circle is finished being created, new values may be entered in the parameter text fields and the newlyĆcreated object will be updated accordingly (unless String Mode is turned on.).
In Preferences→User Interface the number of decimal places displayed in the fields may be controlled as well as whether or not the fields track the current location of the cursor.
D-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
PreĆSelection Highlighting When the Basic Curves dialog box is active, and the Point Method is Infer, an object on which the Selection Ball is placed will always be preĆhighlighted, regardless of the setting of the Preselection option in the Selection Preferences dialog box. This includes all Control points (see below) of the highlighted objects. The preselection color is determined by the setting in the Selection Preferences dialog window.
Control Points Each type of curve has its own unique set of control points (endpoints and midpoints). This table shows the control points for some common curve types.
TIP
Curve
Control Points
Line
Endpoints, midpoint
Arc
Endpoints, midpoint
Complete Circle
Center of circle, Endpoint
The endpoints of a circle are at 0Ăand 360 degrees, at the 3 0'clock position. There are 2 endpoints at the same exact location.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-5
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Inferred Point Selection In line and arc creation, the position of the cursor or Selection Ball as geometry is selected is very important. When the Infer point method is being used, the system infers the following:
Cursor Location (when a control point, arc center, or object is not in the Selection Ball)
Control points (when inside the Selection Ball)
An entire curve (when an object is selected where a control point is not encircled)
Status Line Feedback While Basic Curves are being created, valuable feedback will be given in the Status line. It will tell what kind of point or object is highlighted. It will also display the type of line or arc being created, as well as other useful information.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Inferred Selection Chart
Contents of Selection Ball
Selected Geometry
Nothing
A screen position
An existing point
The existing point
An endpoint or midpoint of a line, arc, or partial ellipse
The control point
A line, arc, conic, or spline, but not one of its control points
The line, arc, conic, or spline
A complete circle or ellipse, (selection ball not over a control point)
The circle or ellipse
An arc center of a circle or ellipse
The center of the circle or ellipse
A complete circle or ellipse, (selection ball over the control point)
The control point (end point)
A knot point of a spline (splines are covered in the Freeform Modeling Course)
The knotĂpoint
EDS All Rights Reserved
Examples
or
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-7
Curve Creation
General Curve Creation Options This section discusses some of the options in the center of the Basic Curves dialog box which apply to many different curve creation situations. The options include Delta, Point Method, and String Mode. We will discuss Point Method and String Mode in this appendix.
Point Method The Point Method option menu, shown below, allows points to be specified relative to existing geometry by specifying a cursor location or by using the Point Subfunction. The options on this menu (other than Inferred Point and Select Face) work similarly to those in the Point Constructor dialog box. Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point Select Face
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Point Constructor (See page Appendix B for more information)
When using a point method other than Infer, several things change:
The cursor location is no longer tracked in the Dialog Bar.
PreĆselection highlighting reverts to the Selection Preferences dialog box status.
Control points are no longer highlighted.
NOTE: A Cursor Location, sometimes called Screen Position, is simply projected onto the XC-YC plane. The ZC value of the point will be 0.
D-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
The Select Face option allows the selection of a face for use as the limiting object for a line. When in any other curve creation mode (arc, circle, spline, etc.) this option is not available. This option can also be used to create a line normal to a face. If the Point Constructor method is chosen, the Point Constructor dialog box is displayed. When Back is chosen from that dialog box, the Basic Curve dialog box returns. Existing Point
End Point Control Point
Cursor Location
Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Quadrant Point
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
None Rectangular Cylindrical
Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none
Spherical Vector Along Curve
String Mode When this option is ON, the end of one object becomes the beginning of the next. To stop string mode, turn the button OFF. To stop string mode and start it again with the next object created, choose Break String or press the middle mouse button. NOTE: When String Mode is turned on, the entering of new values in the parameter text fields as soon as a line or arc is finished being created will not update the previously created curve.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-9
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Line Creation Methods Between Two Points Simply define the two points (see below). The points may be a combination of screen positions and control points selected in the graphics area, or values established by entering numbers in the XC, YC, and ZC fields in the Dialog Bar and pressing . YC ZC
Second point XC
First point
NOTE: If a screen position is specified as the second point, and the Angle Increment value is not zero, the line will snap to the nearest increment of that angle.
Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical When the second point of a line is defined using a screen position, and this selection defines a line that is within the Snap Angle of being vertical or horizontal from the first point, the line will snap to vertical or horizontal. (The Snap Angle is controlled in the Sketch Preferences dialog box.) Snap Angle is only applicable when using the Inferred point method.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
YC ZC
XC
Snap angle is set to 3 Second point
First point
3°
3°
3°
Second point
3°
First point
D-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis
Define the start point.
Enter the desired angle in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press the key. A line at this angle or at this angle plus 180 degrees (depending on where the cursor is relative to the start point) will rubberĆband in the graphics area. See the illustration below. The value in the Angle text field will also update to reflect the start/cursor locations.
Establish the length by specifying a screen position, selecting geometry, or entering a length value in the Dialog Bar.
NOTE: Angles are measured counterĆclockwise from the XC axis. YC ZC
XC
Cursor location
Angle from XC Axis
Start location
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Angle from XC Axis plus 180 degrees
Start location Cursor location
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-11
Curve Creation
Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line
Define the start point of the new line.
Select the existing line, being careful not to select one of its control points.
NOTE: The first two steps may be completed in either order. Move the cursor around. Depending on where the cursor is, the parallel, perpendicular, or angled line (see below) may be previewed. The Status line shows which mode is being previewed. Parallel line
Line at an angle
Defined point
Perpendicular line Selected line
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-12
If it is desired to create a line at an angle to the selected line, enter the desired value in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press tab.
When the line is displayed, establish the length by: specifying a screen position, selecting geometry, or immediately after the line is created, entering a new value in the Dialog Bar.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance Parallel at Distance From - This option affects line creation when a series of parallel lines are being created. When this option is set to Original, each new line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally selected. When it is set to New, each new line is created at the specified distance from the last line created.
Make sure String Mode is Toggled to Off.
Select a line.
Enter the Offset Distance in the Dialog Bar.
Choose Apply. The new line is offset from the line selected and equal in length. The direction of the offset is dependent on how the original line was selected. The offset line is created on the side where the center of the selection ball is when the original line is selected.
Selected line
Offset distance
New line
If Apply is continually chosen, additional parallel lines will be created. The Offset Distance value may be changed at any time.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-13
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve
Define the start point of the new line.
Select the existing curve, being careful not to select one of its control points.
NOTE: The curve may be selected first, then the point may be defined, if a tangent line is being created. If a perpendicular line is being created, the point must be defined first. The line rubberĆbands tangentially to the selected curve. There are times that the rubberĆbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve. Move the cursor inside, then outside the curve until the line snaps to the other side.
When the desired line is displayed, select the highlighted geometry.
The example below shows two examples of creating a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to an arc or circle. (Notice that the dashed line shows the line that would be created with the dashed cursor in that position, or by selecting the object in that position.) The same is true for the solid line and cursor.
Defined point (the endpoint of the arc)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Tangent line
Tangent line Perpendicular line Defined point
Perpendicular line
D-14
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve
Select the first curve, being careful not to select one of its control points.
The line rubberĆbands tangentially or perpendicularly to the selected curve, depending on the cursor position.
Select the second curve, again being careful not to select one of its control points.
When the desired line is displayed, select the highlighted geometry.
The illustration below shows the creation of 2 lines; one is tangent to a circle and the other is perpendicular to a circle. Tangent line Second curve
Perpendicular line First curve
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-15
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line
Select the curve, being careful not to select one of its control points.
Select the line, again being careful not to select one of its control points.
The rubberĆbanding line will be shown parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to, the selected line.
When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a screen position or selecting geometry. A specific length may also be established immediately after the line is created by entering the value in the Dialog Bar.
NOTE: If selecting geometry to specify the length of the line would result in the line type being changed, press the middle mouse button to choose Lock Mode, then select the limiting geometry.
Second object First object
Select the curve and line as shown
The parallel, perpendicular, and angled lines will appear individually as the cursor is moved around
D-16
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Line Creation Chart
Line between two points
Select two points
Line through a point and horizontal, vertical, or at an angle to the WCS
Y X
1
Line through a point and parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to a line
1 2
1
Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve
2
2 1
Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves
Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line
Define the first point Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or Enter the desired angle, press , and define second point. Define a point Select a line Select limiting point/object [Can also select line, then point]
Select a point Select a curve Select limiting point/object (if necessary)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select two curves
2 1
A bisector line
Select two curves Select limiting point/object
Select two lines
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-17
Curve Creation
Activity 1 - Creating Lines In this activity lines will be created using the methods previously discussed. Create the lines as described in the steps only. Additional curves will be created in subsequent activities to further increase understanding. Step 1 Open part file pau_curves_1 and start the Modeling application. Note the location and orientation of the WCS. Step 2 Save the part file as ***_curves_1. Step 3 Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. Step 4 Create Lines Between Two Cursor Locations.
Choose the Line icon if not already selected.
The snap angle is set to the default of 3°. Therefore, when cursor locations are specified within 3° of vertical or horizontal, the line will snap to a truly vertical or horizontal orientation.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Toggle String Mode to Off.
Create a horizontal and vertical line by clicking at two different screen positions each time as shown:
Second selections here
First selections here
TIP
D-18
If a start position was erroneously selected, choosing the icon again will reset the line creation process. There is no need to cancel out of the Basic Curve dialog box.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Create a diagonal line as illustrated below.
Select here
Select here
Notice that the line remains highlighted.
Double click in the Length text box on the Dialog Bar in overstrike mode and enter 4, then press Enter.
The line is edited to that length.
Tab to the Angle text box on the Dialog Bar, enter 45, and press Enter.
The line is edited to that angle. Step 5 Create Lines From Endpoints or Midpoints of One Line to Another.
Change the work layer to 2 and make layer 1 invisible. Turn Fit All before Displaying to On and choose OK.
Choose Refresh (third mouse button).
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-19
Curve Creation
Select the two lines at their midpoints as shown. A line will be created point to point regardless of the snap angle.
Select this line here
Select this line here
Before
After
Select the same two lines at their endpoints on the right. A line will be created point to point regardless of snap angle.
Select this line here
Select this line here
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Before
After
Step 6 Create a Line Through a Point and Parallel to Another Line.
D-20
Select the bottom diagonal line with the cross hairs on the endpoint as shown below. The endpoint highlights before selection.
Select the base line at the top as shown, avoiding control points. (The order does not matter - the line could have been selected before the endpoint.)
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
A line appears rubberĆbanding from the first point at 90° angles from the base line, relative to the cursor position.
Select this line as a base line Select this endpoint
Move the cursor to the right so the rubberĆband image is parallel to the base line and select the middle mouse button to lock in the construction mode of parallel.
A trim point or object now needs to be selected.
Choose the line created on the right, avoiding its control points. This line and the line being created define the intersection point to which the line being created is trimmed.
Choosing this line causes the new line to be trimmed to a point that the two lines have in common (intersection point).
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 7 Create a Line Parallel to an Existing Line at a Distance.
Change the work layer to 3 and make layer 2 invisible.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-21
Curve Creation
Select the line as illustrated below (avoid the line's control points).
In the Dialog Bar, key in an Offset Distance of 2 and press Enter. A line the same length as the existing line is created.
Notice that the line was created on the side of the base line that the selection ball was on at the time of line selection.
Select third mouse button→Cancel.
Choose third mouse button→Undo.
The last line created is removed. Step 8 Create a Line Through a Point at a Specified Angle.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
This line will be started at the WCS origin and its angle defined relative to the WCS.
D-22
Insert→Curve→Basic Curves.
Put focus in the XC text box located in the Dialog Bar.
Enter 0 (zero) and press the Tab key.
In the YC text box, key in 0 (zero) and press the Tab key.
In the ZC text box, key in 0 (zero) and press Enter.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Double click in the Angle text box of the Dialog Bar, type 200, and press the Tab key to lock in that value. Moving the cursor around displays the intended rubberĆbanded line (or a line at 20° if the cursor is in the upper right area).
Position the cursor in the lower left to display the 200° line.
Instead of selecting a trim line as in Step 6, select a screen position. A theoretical trim line was projected off of the current cursor position and perpendicular to the line created, defining the endpoint of the line. 200°
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Theoretical trim line
Step 9 Create a Line Through a Point and Tangent to an Existing Arc/Circle.
Change the work layer to 5 and make layer 3 invisible.
Ensure that Unbounded is Off.
Select the left endpoint of the horizontal line.
Select on the right side of the arc, not on a control point.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-23
Curve Creation
As you do this, the Status line will indicate Tangent.
Step 10 Create a Line at an Angle from a Line and Tangent to a Curve. To create a line at a specific angle from a base line and tangent to an existing curve, both objects must be coplanar. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the base line.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-24
Select the last line created avoiding its control points. This defines the base line.
In the Dialog Bar, double click in the Angle text box and key in 20. Press Tab to lock in the angle value.
Select the circle on the upper left side.
Move the selection ball around until the status line reads Angle, then use the middle mouse button to select Lock Mode.
Select the horizontal line away from its control points.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
A line is created tangent to the arc, at an angle of 20° from the base curve and trimmed to the horizontal line.
20°
Step 11 Save the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-25
Curve Creation
Creating Arcs and Circles Arcs and circles are created with different icons and minor differences in functionality. Both provide immediate display feedback and rely on the simple definition of arc center, size, and start and end points. As a matter of definition, circle means a complete circle, and an arc is a portion of a circle.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-26
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Creating Arcs When creating arcs, there are several things to keep in mind:
Arcs have four control points: two endpoints, a midpoint, and the arc center.
If an arc is chosen such that one of its four control points lies within the Selection Ball, its control point will be selected.
If an arc is chosen with none of its control points within the Selection Ball, the arc itself will be selected, inferring tangency or a trim location.
Creation Method There are two methods for creating arcs:
Start, End, Point on Arc With this method, an arc may be created that passes through three points, or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object.
Center, Start, End With this method, the center point, then the start and endpoints of the arc are defined, which can be adjusted by entering angle values in the Dialog Bar.
Dialog Bar Fields Radius
EDS All Rights Reserved
Diameter
Start Angle
End Angle
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-27
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Creating Circles Circle creation simply requires the definition of a center location and a size. That information can be defined by numerical entry or selections from the screen.
Center Point, Point on Circle
Define a point. This becomes the center of the circle.
Define a second point. The circumference of the circle passes through this point. A value may be entered in the Dialog Bar to establish an exact radius or diameter.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Second point
First point
D-28
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Activity 2 - Creating Arcs and Circles In this activity, different methods will be used to create arcs and circles. Continue working with the ***_curves_1 file. Step 1 Create an Arc through three points. Three points will be used to create an arc. The arc will start at the first point, end at the second, and pass through the third.
Change the work layer to 7 and make layer 5 invisible.
Choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves.
Choose the Arc icon.
Turn String Mode Off.
Choose the Start, End, Point on Arc Creation Method (if necessary).
Create an arc by selecting the screen positions in order as shown: First selection (for start point)
Third selection (for arc size)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Second selection (for end point)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-29
Curve Creation
Zoom out, if necessary, to see the entire arc.
Step 2 Create an Arc through two points and tangent to another arc.
Select the ends of the 45° line, as shown below.
Select the arc just created. Do not select on a control point.
An arc is created that is tangent to the first arc created. Third selection (for arc size) First selection (for start point)
Second selection (for end point)
Step 3 Create an Arc by defining the size and end angles.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Choose the Center, Start, End method.
Double click in the XC text box on the Dialog Bar and enter 0, press Tab, in the YC text box enter 0, press Enter
Select the upper right endpoint of the 45° line again. An arc displays in preview and the Cue Line prompts for an end point or object.
D-30
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Select the right endpoint of the horizontal line as shown: First selection (for start point)
Second selection (for end point)
Choose Fit.
The arc is created starting at the diagonal line endpoint and ending at a point that is in line with the arc center and the end of the horizontal line endpoint. Step 4 Save the part.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-31
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Arc/Circle Creation Chart
Start point, end point, point on arc
3
2
Define first point Define second point Define third point
1
Start point, end point, tangent object
3
2
Define first point Define second point Select tangent object
1
Start point, tangent object, end point
1 3
2
Arc center, start point, end point
2
3
Define start point Select tangent object Define end point
Define first point Define second point Define third point
1
Circle center, point on circle
Define first point Define second point
2 1
Circle center, tangent object 1
D-32
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Define point Select tangent object
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Fillets Fillets are arcs that have tangent relationships with one or more curves. They are editable as fillets, meaning the tangent relationships will be maintained as the fillet radius or arc center is changed. This section contains a brief explanation of Fillet creation functionality. At the end of this section, you will find a summary of Fillet creation methods. There are three Fillet creation methods: Simple, 2 Curve, and 3 Curve, the latter two methods allow manual trimming options. When the Fillet icon is chosen on the Basic Curves dialog box, the Curve Fillet dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-33
Curve Creation
Procedure
Choose the type of fillet desired.
Indicate the desired trim methods for the objects (two and three curve only).
Enter the radius of the fillet.
Select the objects.
Specify the approximate center of the fillet (two and three curve only).
When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets, trim options for each of the selected curves may be specified. If no trimming options are selected, none of the curves are trimmed. Select from the following trim options: Trim First Curve Trim/Delete Second Curve Trim Third Curve The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are applicable to the 3ĆCurve Fillet only. When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets the approximate center must be indicated; this is accomplished by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. Using the cursor location method in Point Constructor selects a position in the XĆY plane of the WCS.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
If a fillet is created other than desired, Undo may be selected to delete the fillet and restore the selected curves.
D-34
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Simple Fillet Simple Fillet creates a fillet between two coplanar nonĆparallel lines. The size of the fillet is determined by entering a value for the radius first. The lines are automatically trimmed to the points of tangency. NOTE: The trim options and Point Constructor are not available. The fillet that is created is directly related to where the lines were selected. The Selection Ball must be positioned in such a manner as to include both lines. If the Selection Ball contains only one line, an error message displays. Crosshairs L1
L1
Selected quadrant
L2
L2
AFTER
BEFORE
As both lines are selected, the crosshairs determine which fillet is created; it indicates the center of the arc. Position the crosshairs in the quadrant formed by the lines to define the desired fillet center. Each line extends or trims to theĂarc.
Before
After
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-35
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
2 Curve Fillet The 2 Curve Fillet constructs a fillet between two curves, including points, lines, circles, conics or splines. A two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the second. Curve 1
Curve 2
Approximate fillet center
Curve 2
Curve 1
If the two selected curves are in different planes, the fillet plane is the plane containing the tangent of the first curve. The plane is normal to the vectors that are normal to both tangents and is totally independent of the WCS. (See below.) Curve 1
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Fillet plane
Fillet
Vectors normal to both tangents Curve 2
D-36
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
3 Curve Fillet This option creates a fillet between three curves, which can be any combination of points, lines, arcs, conics, and splines. The Radius entry box is not available because it is determined by the geometry selected. A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the third curve. The system constructs the fillet in such a manner that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. The three curves do not have to lie in the same plane. Curve 3
Curve 1
Curve 2 Before
After
The system trims curves, based on the selected options, to the tangent point of the fillet. If any one of the curves selected is an arc, the system prompts for additional information to create the fillet:
Tangent Outside
Fillet Within Circle
Circle Within Fillet.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-37
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Curve 1
Curve 1 After
Before
Fillet
Curve 2 Curve 3
Curve 3
Tangent Outside
Curve 1 Curve 1
Fillet
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 3
Before
After
Fillet Within Circle
D-38
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Curve 1
Curve 1
Fillet
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 3
Before
After
Circle Within Fillet The Point Constructor selections may be used to create a cliff edge fillet, where the fillet is contiguous with a selected curve, but not tangent to it. 1
2
3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
1
2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-39
Curve Creation
Fillet Creation Methods Chart Note: Numbered steps indicate this is not the only way the arc/circle can be created. Simple fillet (lines only)
Select both lines simultaneously (both must intersect the selection ball)
2 curve fillet
Select first object Select second object 2
3
If the objects extend beyond their intersection point, you must also specify a quadrant for the center of the fillet.
1
3 curve fillet
Select first object Select second object Select third object
3 1
2
To edit a fillet, use the Edit "Curve"Fillet option.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
This concludes discussion of the creation functions found on the Basic Curves dialog box.
D-40
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Activity 3 - Creating Fillets Step 1 Create a Simple Fillet.
Open part file pau_fillet_1 and select the Modeling application.
Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.
Choose the Fillet icon.
Choose the Simple Fillet icon.
Remember, only two lines are used to create a Simple Fillet.
Enter a radius of .75.
Practice placing fillets in 4 different line configurations.
In Area #1, select the fillet lines in each of the four corners as shown below. Keep both lines inside the Selection Ball when selecting. Cursor placement is critical.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
After
Before
To restore the lines to their original state, choose Undo (using the third mouse button). Step 2 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (Trimming Only One Curve). For this step create a fillet with two curves, but trim just one of the curves.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-41
Curve Creation
Choose the 2 Curve Fillet icon.
Define which object will be trimmed. In this case trim the line but not the arc. (See below.)
Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on.
Choose the Trim Second Curve button to turn the option off.
Ensure that the system retained .75 for the radius.
In area #2, select the yellow line (first object), then select the arc (second object).
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown below.
Select second Indicate here
Select first
After
Before
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Step 3 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (and Use a Point for One of the Curves). Notice that the fillet process is modal, that more fillets may be created without reselecting any icons.
D-42
Enter 1.5 for the radius.
In area 2, select the cyan line.
Choose Point Constructor.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Select the endpoint at the left end of the white line.
Indicate here Select point Select first
After
Before
Choose Back to return to the Create Fillet dialog box.
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above.
Step 4 Create a 3 Curve Fillet. Trim the first and third curves and delete the second.
Choose the 3 Curve Fillet icon.
Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on.
Choose the Delete Second Curve button to turn it on.
Ensure that Trim Third Curve is turned on.
Select the 3 curves in a counterclockwise order as shown.
Select first
Select second
Select third
Indicate here
Before
EDS All Rights Reserved
After
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-43
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above.
Step 5 Close all part files and do not save.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-44
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Editing Curves The options on the Edit Curve option allows the modifications of existing curves. To display the dialog box, choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves to display the Basic Curves dialog box, then choose the Edit Curve Parameters icon.
Edit Curve Parameters Trim
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-45
Curve Creation
Edit Curve Parameters When this icon is active and a curve is selected, the edit mode for that type of curve appears. The following types of curve edits are discussed in this section:
Editing a Line
Editing an Arc or Circle
Editing a Line A line may be edited by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and angle). To change a line's endpoint:
Select the line end to be modified. The line now rubberĆbands from the fixed end.
Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the dialog box.
A line may also be Stretched to move its endpoint. To change a line's parameters:
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-46
Select the line, avoiding its control points.
Enter new values for the length and/or angle in the Dialog Bar, then press .
The direction that the line is extended is dependent on which side of the center control point selected.
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Editing an Arc or Circle The two methods used to edit an arc or circle are Parameters and Dragging. The arc's or circle's parameters may be changed by entering new values in the Dialog Bar, or changing them by dragging to a new location.
Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location An arc or circle may be moved to a new location, regardless of the editing mode that is active, as follows:
Select the center of the arc or circle.
Drag the arc or circle to a new location, or enter a new XC, YC, ZC location in the Dialog Bar.
Using Parameters Mode To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode:
Select the arc or circle, avoiding its control points.
Enter new values in the radius, diameter, start angle, and/or end angle fields in the Dialog Bar and press .
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-47
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
Using Dragging Mode There are two ways to change an arc or circle using Dragging mode:
To change the radius of the arc or circle, select it, avoiding its control points, and drag it. When it is the size desired, press the first mouse button.
Other geometry may also be selected to control the size of the arc. For example, a line may be selected to make the arc tangent to it, or the endpoint of another arc may be selected to make the selected arc pass through it.
To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle, select it at the desired endpoint and drag it. When the angle is correct, press the first mouse button.
Other geometry may also be selected to control the start and/or end angles of the arc. A line may be selected to stop the arc at its intersection with the line, or an endpoint of another object may be selected, and that endpoint will be projected onto the arc to determine its start angle.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-48
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
Trim When a curve is trimmed, it is trimmed to its intersection with one or two bounding objects. A bounding object can be a curve, face, point, plane, or view point. Caution must be taken when selecting the curve to trim. The portion of the curve being trimmed determines which end is trimmed. The segment of the object that is selected is always removed or extended (see below). If there are multiple intersection points, select near the desired intersection, the system will prompt for the selection of the desired intersection point to be used as the bounding point. Bounding Arc
Bounding Arc
Intersection Point
Intersection Point If the line is selected here
The left part of the line is trimmed AFTER TRIM
BEFORE TRIM
One bounding object must be specified, and not more than two, when trimming a curve. Once the bounding objects have been specified, multiple curves may be specified and they will all be trimmed to the bounding objects.
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Procedure
Select the bounding objects.
Define the type of trim to perform.
Select the curve to trim.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-49
Curve Creation
Activity 4 - Trimming Curves Step 1 Trim Curves to One Bounding Object.
Open the part file pau_editcurve_1.
Select the Modeling application.
Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves.
Choose the Trim icon.
Step 2 Trim the Three lines to an Arc.
Select the arc as the first bounding object. LINE1 LINE2
Select the arc as the bounding object
LINE3
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Click MB2. In this case, it is not necessary to have a second bounding object, so the selection may be skipped by clicking MB2.
Select LINE1 as shown below as the curve to trim.
Select the first line to be trimmed
LINE1 LINE2
LINE3
D-50
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Curve Creation
The bounding curves don't change, so continue trimming.
Select the lower end of the second line. LINE1 LINE2
LINE3
The second line is trimmed to the defined bounding line.
Select the lower end of the third line. LINE1 LINE2
LINE3
The system will trim LINE3 by the combination of the side of the midpoint of LINE3 and the side of the bounding curve. Step 3 Close the part.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
D-51
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Curve Creation
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
D-52
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
WCS Options
WCS Options Appendix E
This appendix describes additional WCS manipulation options. WCS Origin: Allows the location of the WCS to be altered using the Point Constructor, while the rotation of the axes remains unchanged.
Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS, Primitives or any other geometry, the definition of specific points in space is necessary, and is a common function in any CAE system. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location. Using the Point Constructor dialog box, you can define origin points, start points, endpoints, etc. based on existing geometry or coordinate values. End Point Control Point
Existing Point Cursor Location
Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Point on Surface
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Point on Curve/Edge
Quadrant Point None Rectangular Cylindrical Spherical
Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none
Vector Along Curve
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E-1
WCS Options
NOTE: For more information on Point types, see Appendix B. Endpoint selected as new WCS origin
Before
After
Rotate WCS: Allows the rotation of the WCS to be altered, while the location of the axes remains unchanged. The top line of the following menu could be read Rotate about ZC, XC to YC".
The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate about ZC: XC to YC Before
After
About the ZC axis, from the XC axis toward the YC axis 90
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Hot Keys
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ F ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Hot Keys Appendix F
This appendix describes the various short cuts via Hot Keys
Hot Key CtrlĆA CtrlĆB CtrlĆC CtrlĆD CtrlĆE
Function Assembly Navigator Edit, Blank Copy Delete Tools, Expression
Hot Key CtrlĆN CtrlĆO CtrlĆP CtrlĆQ CtrlĆR
CtrlĆF CtrlĆG CtrlĆH CtrlĆI CtrlĆJ CtrlĆK CtrlĆL CtrlĆM
Fit View Grip Execute
CtrlĆS CtrlĆT CtrlĆU CtrlĆV CtrlĆW CtrlĆX CtrlĆY CtrlĆZ
Information, Object Edit, Object Display Format, Layer Settings Application, Modeling
EDS All Rights Reserved
Function File, New File, Open File, Plot View, Operation, Rotate (full menu) File, Save Edit, Transform Execute User Function Paste Application, Gateway Cut Edit, Undo
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
F-1
Hot Keys
ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆA CtrlĆShiftĆB ÉÉÉ F ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆC
CtrlĆShiftĆG CtrlĆShiftĆH
File, Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Edit, Blank, Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO All View, Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP CtrlĆShiftĆQ CtrlĆShiftĆR Format, Layout, Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Views Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU
CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆJ CtrlĆShiftĆK
CtrlĆShiftĆV CtrlĆShiftĆW CtrlĆShiftĆX
CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆF
Preferences, Object Edit, Blank, Unblank SeĆ lected
CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator
CtrlĆShiftĆY CtrlĆShiftĆZ
AltĆTab AltĆF4 F1
Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context
CtrlĆAltĆB CtrlĆAltĆC CtrlĆAltĆM
F3 F4 F5
View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh
CtrlĆAltĆN CtrlĆAltĆW CtrlĆAltĆX
F6 F7
Quick Zoom Quick Rotate
F-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Format, Layout, New Format, Layout, Open Tools, Macro, Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools, Macro, Record Toolsm Macro, Step Preferences, Selection Edit, Blank, Unblank All Of Part Format, Visible In View
View, Operation, Zoom (full menu)
Tools, Boundary Tools, CLSF Application ManufacturĆ ing Tools, Unisim Application Assemblies Tools, Lathe Cross-SecĆ tion
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
Glossary
ABS - Absolute coordinate system. Absolute Coordinate System - Coordinate system in which all geometry is located from a fixed or absolute zero point. active view - One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work. angle - In Unigraphics, an angle measured on the XĆY plane of a coordinate system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis side of the XĆY plane. An angle swept in the opposite direction is said to be negative. arc - An incomplete circle; sometimes used interchangeably with the term circle." ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is a set of 8Ćbit binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and other special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol. aspect ratio - The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size of a symbol from its original. assembly - A collection of piece parts and subĆassemblies representing a product. In Unigraphics, an assembly is a part file which contains components. assembly part - A Unigraphics part file which is a userĆdefined, structured combination of subĆassemblies, components and/or objects. associativity - The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information to aid in automating the design, drafting, and manufacture of parts in Unigraphics. attributes - Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
GL-1
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Glossary
block font - A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for creating text in drafting objects and dimensions. body - Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet body). bottomĆup modeling - Modeling technique where component parts are designed and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level assembly. All assemblies using the component are automatically updated when opened to reflect the geometric edits made at the piece part level.
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
boundary - A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part from a vantage point. CAD/CAM - Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing. category, layer - A name assigned to a layer, or group of layers. A category, if descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned, will assist the user in identifying and managing data in a part file. chaining - A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined endĆtoĆend. circle - A complete and closed arc, sometimes used interchangeably with the term arc." component - A collection of objects, similar to a group, in an assembly part. A component may be a subĆassembly consisting of other, lower level components. component part - The part file or master" pointed to by a component within an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and referenced, not copied, by the assembly. A separate Unigraphics part file that the system associates with a component object in the assembly part. cone direction - Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction. cone origin - Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction. half angle - The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone and its side.
GL-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
constraints - Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch. The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional. construction points - Points used to create a spline. Construction points may be used as poles (control vertices), defining points, or data points. See POLES, DEFINING POINTS, and DATA POINTS. control point - Represents a specific location on an existing object. A line has three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. The control point for a closed circle is its center, while the control points for an open arc are its end and midpoints. A spline has a control point at each knot point. A control point is a position on existing geometry. Any of the following points: 1. Existing Points 2. Endpoints of conics 3. Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. Center points of circles 5. Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. Endpoints of splines. convert curve - A method of creating a bĆcurve in which curves (lines, arcs, conics or splines) may be selected for conversion into a bĆcurve. Coordinate System - A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS). counterclockwise - The rightĆhand rule determines the counterĆ clockwise direction. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive direction, counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move from the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis. current layout - The layout currently displayed on the screen. Layout data is kept in an intermediate storage area until it is saved. curve - A curve in Unigraphics is any line, arc, conic, spline or bĆcurve. A geometric object; this may refer to a line, an arc, a conic, or a spline. defaults - Assumed values when they are not specifically defined. defining points - Spline construction points. Splines created using defining points are forced to pass through the points. These points are guaranteed to be on the spline. degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows - ArrowĆlike indicators that show areas that require more information to fully constrain a sketch. design in context - The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be selected to aid in the modeling. Also referred to as edit in place.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
GL-3
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Glossary
dimensional constraint - This is a scalar value or expression which limits the measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line, the radius of an arc, or the distance between two points. directory - A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of filenames together with information for locating those files. displayed part - The part currently displayed in the graphics window.
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
edit in place - See design in context. emphasize work part - A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry in the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly. endpoint - An endpoint of a curve or an existing point. expression - An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value. Expressions are used to control dimensions and the relationships between dimensions of a model. face - A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges. feature - An allĆencompassing term which refers to all solids, bodies, and primitives. file - A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and associated with a specified space. In Unigraphics, parts, and patterns are a few types of files. filtering - See object filtering. font box - A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects. The font box defines the size, width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font. font, character - A set of characters designed at a certain size, width and spacing. font, line - Various styles of lines and curves, such as solid, dashed, etc.
GL-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
free form feature - A body of zero thickness. (see body and sheet body) generator curve - A contiguous set of curves, either open or closed, that can be swept or revolved to create a body. geometric constraint - A relationship between one or more geometric objects that forces a limitation. For example, two lines that are perpendicular or parallel specifies a geometric constraint. grid - A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations which are entered by using the screen position" option. guide curve - A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep operation. virtual intersection - Intersection formed by extending two line segments that do not touch to the position that they cross. The line segments must be nonĆparallel and coplanar. inflection - A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to convex, or vice versa. interactive step - An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in performing a Unigraphics function. isometric view (TfrĆISO) - Isometric view orientation - one where equal distances along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane. One of the axes is vertical. knot points - The defining points of a spline. Points along a BĆspline, representing the endpoints of each spline segment. layer - A layer is a partition of a part. Layers are analogous to the transparent material used by conventional designers. For example, the user may create all geometry on one layer, all text and dimensions on a second, and tool paths on a third. layout - A collection of viewports or window areas, in which views are displayed. The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one, two, four or six viewports.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
GL-5
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Glossary
layouts - Standard layouts are available to the user. These include: L1 - Single View, L2 - Two Views, L3 - Two Views, L4 - Four Views, L6 - Six Views. Information window - The window used in listing operations, such as Info. loaded part - Any part currently opened and in memory. Parts are loaded explicitly using the File→Open option and implicitly when they are used in an assembly being opened.
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
menu - A list of options from which the user makes a selection. model space - The coordinate system of a newly created part. This is also referred to as the absolute coordinate system." Any other coordinate system may be thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate system. name, expression - - The name of an expression is the single variable on the left hand side of the expression. All expression names must be unique in a part file. Each expression can have only one name. See expression. objects - All geometry within the Unigraphics environment. offset face - A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting) points along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to create a true" offset. options - A number of various alternatives (functions, modes, parameters, etc.) from among which the user can choose. origin - The point X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system. parametric design - Concept used to define and control the relationships between the features of a model. Concept where the features of the model are defined by parameters. part - A Unigraphics file containing a .prt extension. It may be a piece part containing model geometry, a subĆassembly, or a topĆlevel assembly.
GL-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
part or model - A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may represent some object or structure. partially loaded part - A component part which, for performance reasons, has not been fully loaded. Only those portions of the component part necessary to render the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set). point set - A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on that curve. Point Subfunction Menu - A list of options (methods) by which positions can be specified in Unigraphics. readĆonly part - A part for which the user does not have write access privilege. real time dynamics - Produces smooth pan, zoom, and rotation of a part, though placing great demand on the CPU. Refresh - A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the viewing screen. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by Blank or Delete. rightĆhand rule, conventional - The rightĆhand rule is used to determine the orientation of a coordinate system. If the origin of the coordinate system is in the palm of the right fist, with the back of the hand lying on a table, the outward extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis, the upward extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis, and the outward extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis. rightĆhand rule for rotation - The rightĆhand rule for rotation is used to associate vectors with directions of rotation. When the thumb is extended and aligned with a given vector, the curled fingers determine the associated direction of rotation. Conversely, when the curled fingers are held so as to indicate a given direction of rotation, the extended thumb determines the associated vector. screen cursor (cursor) - A marker on the screen which the user moves around using some position indicator device. Used for indicating positions, selecting objects, etc. Takes the form of a fullĆscreen cross. sheet - A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume. A body of zeroĆthickness. Also called sheet body.)
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
GL-7
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Glossary
sketch - A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline of a particular design. You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design. The sketch can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature. Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) - The SCS is a coordinate system which corresponds to the plane of the sketch. When a sketch is created the WCS is changed to the SCS of the new sketch. solid body - An enclosed volume. A type of body (see Body).
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
spline - A smooth freeĆform curve. stored layout - The last saved version of a layout. stored view - The last saved version of a view. string - A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points. subĆassembly - A part which both contains components and is itself used as a component in higherĆlevel assemblies. surface - The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body. A surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet body). The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet. system - The Unigraphics System. temporary part - An empty part which is optionally created for any component parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly. topĆdown modeling - Modeling technique where component parts can be created and edited while working at the assembly level. Geometric changes made at the assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual component part when saved. trim - To shorten or extend a curve. trimetric view (TfrĆTri) - A viewing orientation which provides you with an excellent view of the principal axes. In Unigraphics II, the trimetric view has the ZĆaxis vertical. The measure along the XĆaxis is 7/8 of the measure along Z, and the measure along the YĆaxis is 3/4 of the measure along Z.
GL-8
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
Unigraphics - A computer based turnkey graphics system for computerĆaided design, drafting, and manufacturing, produced by UGS. units - The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in Unigraphics. Upon log on, you may define the unit of measure as inches or millimeters. upgraded component - A component which was originally created preĆV10 but has been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry. version - A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of modifications that have been made to the part since its creation. view - A particular display of the model. View parameters include view orientation matrix; center; scale; X,Y and Z clipping bounds; perspective vector; drawing reference point and scale. Eight standard views are available to the user: Top, Front, Right, Left, Bottom, Back, TfrĆISO (topĆfrontĆright isometric), and TfrĆTri (topĆfrontĆright trimetric). view dependent edit - A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current work view only. view dependent modifications - Modifications to the display of geometry in a particular view. These include erase from view and modify color, font and width. view dependent geometry - Geometry created within a particular view. It will only be displayed in that view. WCS - Work Coordinate System. WCS, work plane - The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate system singled out by the user for use in construction, verification, etc. The coordinates of the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC, YC, ZC. The XCĆYC plane is called the work plane. Work Coordinate System - See WCS. work layer - The layer on which geometry is being constructed. You may create objects on only one layer at a time.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
GL-9
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Glossary
work part - The part in which you create and edit geometry. The work part can be your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your displayed assembly part. When displaying a piece part, the work part is always the same as the displayed part. work view - The view in which work is being performed. When the creation mode is view dependent, any construction and view dependent editing that is performed will occur only in the current work view. XC axis - XĆaxis of the work coordinate system. YC axis - YĆaxis of the work coordinate system. ZC axis - ZĆaxis of the work coordinate system.
GL-10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Index
Index
A
Body, GL-2 Boolean Operations, 14-6 Intersect, 14-9 Subtract, 14-9 Unite, 14-8
ABS, 2-3, GL-1 Absolute Coordinate System, GL-1 Active View, GL-1 Activities Blend Solid Edges, 9-6, 9-12 Chamfer Edges, 6-13 Circular Array, 16-11 Datum Plane - Dual Constraints, 11-27 Exit Unigraphics, 1-41 Form Feature Boss Creation, 3-34 Hollow Solid, 5-5, 5-7 Manipulating the Work Coordinate System, 2-10 Opening an Existing Part File, 1-16 Save Part As, 1-39 Angle, GL-1 Annotation Editor editing text, 10-52 placing the text, 10-50 tool bar, 10-49 Apparent intersection point, B-6 Arc, GL-1 dialog bar fields, D-27 edit, D-47 ASCII, GL-1 Aspect Ratio, GL-1 Assemblies, GL-1 bottom-up , 8-6 designing in context, 8-5 Work Part, 8-16 Assembly, definition of, 8-2 Associativity, GL-1 Attribute, GL-1 Automatic Centerline, 10-20 Automatic Update, 10-17
B Blend, 6-3 Block, 2-18
Boss, 3-33 Bottom-Up Modeling, GL-2 Bottom-Up modeling, 8-5 Boundary, GL-2 Break String, during curve creation, D-9
C Cartesian, 2-2 Category, Layer, GL-2 Chaining, GL-2 Chamfer, 6-10 Circle, D-28, GL-2 creation method, center point, point on circle, D-28 edit, D-47 Circular Array, 16-5 Class selection subfunction filter methods, 1-37 color, 1-37 features, 1-37 type, 1-37 name, 1-37 up one level, 1-38 Close, 1-41 Part File, 1-41 Component, GL-2 Part, GL-2 Component Object, definition of, 8-3 Component Part, definition of, 8-4 Components, add existing part , 8-12 Cone Direction, GL-2 Origin, GL-2 Constraints, GL-3 Geometric, 13-59, 13-64, 13-69, 13-76
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
IN-1
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Index geometric displaying, 13-73 removing, 13-73 Construction Points, GL-3 Control Point, GL-3 Control points, D-5 Convert, Curves to BĆCurves, GL-3 Coordinate Systems, GL-3 Absolute, 2-2 Cartesian, 2-2 moving of WCS, 2-4 Sketch, GL-8 Work, 2-2 reorienting of, 2-16, 2-24 Copy, transform, C-4 Counterclockwise, GL-3 Create Expressions, 4-3 Part, 1-9 Create Centerline, 10-10 Creating Dimensions, 10-29 Creating Utility Symbols, 10-19 Current Layout, GL-3 Cursor, GL-7 Curve, GL-3 edit, D-45 trim, D-49 Curve parameters, edit, curve, D-46 Curves, basic, D-3 Cylinder, 2-27
D Datum Axis, 12-2
Designing in Context, 8-5 Destination layer, C-3 original, C-3 specify, C-3 work, C-3 Dialog bar during arc creation, D-27 in curve creation, D-4 Dimension Constraints, GL-4 Dimension Local Settings, 10-33 Dimensions, 13-61 creating dimensions, 10-29 local settings, 10-33 appended text controls, 10-34 arrow line display, 10-40 extension line display, 10-40 leader direction options, 10-41 placement options, 10-39 precision options, 10-35 text justification options, 10-42 Direction, Cone, GL-2 Directory, GL-4 Displayed Part, 1-15, 8-13, GL-4 Double Offset Chamfer, 6-12 Drafting Application, uses of, 10-2 Drawing Operations modifying a drawing, 10-3 removing drawing views , 10-10 Drawings adding a view, 10-7 setting the view display preferences, 10-14 automatic update, 10-17 hidden line removal, 10-15 silhouettes, 10-17 smooth edges, 10-16, 10-17 uses of the drafting application, 10-2 Dual Constraints, 12-4
Datum Plane, 11-3 Dual Constraints, 12-4
E
Defaults, GL-3
Edge Blends, 6-4
Defining Points, 2-4, GL-3 Delayed Update, 15-3
Edit Expressions, 4-3 Feature, 15-2, 15-5 transform, C-2
Delete, Feature, 15-9
Edit - Undo, 1-26
Delete positioning dimension, 15-30
Edit curve, line, D-46
Design in Context, GL-3
Edit curve parameters, curve, D-46
DegreeĆofĆfreedom Arrows, 13-59, GL-3
IN-2
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Index Edit dimension value, positioning dimension, feature, 15-30 Edit in Place, GL-4 Edit Parameters, 15-27 Move Feature, 15-7
Filter Box, 1-18 Filter methods, 1-37 color, 1-37 type, 1-37 Filtering, GL-4
Endpoint, GL-4
Font Box, GL-4 Character, GL-4 Line, GL-4
Expression Editor, 4-4
Form Features, types of, 3-2
Editing Features, 15-2, 15-5 Emphasize Work Part, GL-4
Expressions, GL-4 Creating and Editing, 4-3 Names, GL-6
F Face, GL-4 Feature Creation Block, 2-18 Boolean Operations, 14-6 Boss, 3-33 Chamfer, 6-10 Cylinder, 2-27 Datum Axis, 12-2 Hole, 3-14 Hollow Solid, 5-3 Instance, 16-3 Pad, 3-38 Pocket, 3-30 Primitives, 2-17 Slot, 3-21 Subtract, 14-9 Unite, 14-8 Features, GL-4 Edit, 15-2, 15-5 Hole, 3-14 Intersect, 14-9 unsuppress, 15-6 File, GL-4 close, 1-41 Close Part, 1-41 New, 1-9 Open, 1-17 Quit, 1-42 Save Part As, 1-39 Fillet create, two curve fillet, D-36 feature, create simple fillet, D-35 three curve fillet, D-37
Free Form Feature, GL-5
G Generator Curve, GL-5 Geometric Constraint, GL-5 Grid, GL-5 Guide Curve, GL-5
H
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Half Angle, GL-2 Hidden Line Removal, 10-15 Hole, 3-14 Hollow Feature, 5-3 Wall Thickness, 5-3
I Implementation of Design Standards, class standards, -3 Implied intersection point, B-6 Infer, point method, D-6 Inflection, GL-5 Instance, 16-2, 16-3 Circular Array, 16-5 Rectangular Array, 16-4 Intersect, 14-9 Intersection point apparent, B-6 implied, B-6 Introduction, -1 terminology, -6
K Knot Points, GL-5
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
IN-3
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Index
L
rectangular, B-12 spherical, B-14 vector, B-14 Offset Angle, Chamfer, 6-12 Offset Surface, GL-6 Open, Part File, 1-17 Origin, Cone, GL-2
Layer, GL-5 Layout, GL-5, GL-6 List information, Model Navigation Tool, 15-43 Listing Window, GL-6 Loaded Part, GL-6
P
Locking a Constraint, 13-23
M MB1, 1-24 MB2, 1-24 MB3, 1-24 Menu, GL-6 Message, Part File Saved, 1-40 Millimeters, 1-9 Mirror through a line, transform, C-11 Model, GL-7 Model Navigation Tool, popĆup menu options, List Information, 15-43 Model Space, 2-2, GL-6 Modeling Operations, 5-2, 6-2 Modifying a Drawing, 10-3 Move Feature, 15-7 transform, C-4 Multiple copies, transform, C-4
N NonĆuniform scale, transform, C-8 Notes and Labels editing text, 10-52 placing the text, 10-50 creating text with a leader, 10-51
O Object, GL-6 Offset along curve, B-15 cylindrical, B-13
IN-4
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Pad, 3-38 Parametric Design, GL-6 Part, GL-6, GL-7 Partially Loaded Part, GL-7 Parts fully loaded, 8-8 partially loaded, 8-8 unloaded, 8-9 Pocket, 3-30 Rectangular, 3-30, 3-38 Point Set, GL-7 Point Subfunction, GL-7 Point subfunction angle on arc/ellipse, B-8 arc/ellipse center, B-7 control point, B-5 copying a point to work layer, B-3 cursor location, B-2, B-3 end point, B-4 existing point, B-3 intersection point, B-6 offset, B-10 along curve, B-15 cylindrical, B-13 rectangular, B-12 spherical, B-14 vector, B-14 quadrant point, B-9 reset, B-11 using screen position with a grid, B-3 Pre-selection highlighting, during basic curve creation, D-5 Primitives, 15-1 Procedures Body of Revolution, Trim to Face, 14-37 Toolbox-Curve, Fillets, D-41 Toolbox-Curve, Line, D-10 Toolbox-Curve, Trim Curve, D-50
Q Quit Unigraphics, 1-42
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Index
R ReadĆOnly Part, GL-7 Real Time Dynamics, GL-7 Rectangular Pocket, 3-30, 3-38 Slot, 3-22 Reference Feature Datum Axis, 12-2 Datum Plane, 11-3 types of, 11-2 Refresh, GL-7 Removing Drawing Views , 10-10 Reposition, 8-18 rotate about a line, 8-23 rotate about a point, 8-22 translate, 8-21, 8-22 Respecify Parameters, 15-27 Right Hand Rule, 2-2, GL-7 Rotate, the WCS, 2-11 Rotate about a line reposition, 8-23 transform, C-12
Smooth Edges, 10-16, 10-17 Snap Angle, 13-23 Snap angle, D-10 Solid Body, GL-8 Specify, destination layer, C-3 Spline, GL-8 Stored Layout, GL-8 Stored View, GL-8 String, GL-8 SubĆassembly, GL-8 Sub-assembly, definition of, 8-2 Subdivisions, transform, C-4 Subtract, 14-9 Surface, GL-8 Symbols, creating utility symbols, 10-19 associativity of utility symbols, 10-20 deleting a utility symbol, 10-20 System, GL-8
Rotate about a point reposition, 8-22 transform, C-10
Target Solid, 14-7
Rotation, GL-7
TfrĆTri, GL-8
S Save Part As, 1-39 Scale, transform, C-7 SCS, GL-8 Selection Toolbar, 1-27, 8-13, 8-16, 15-15 Sheet, GL-7 Silhouettes, 10-17 Simple fillet, create, D-35 Single Offset Chamfer, 6-11 Sketch, GL-8 constraining of, 13-61 Coordinate System, GL-8 Sketch Curve Creation, 13-22 Slot, 3-21 Rectangular, 3-22
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
T Temporary Part, GL-8 TfrĆISO, GL-5 Three curve fillet, create, D-37 Tool Solid, 14-7 Top-Down Modeling, GL-8 Top-Down modeling, 8-5 Trace status, transform, C-3 Transform copy, C-4 destination layer, C-3 edit, C-2 mirror through a line, C-11 move, C-4 multiple copies, C-4 nonĆuniform scale, C-8 rotate about a line, C-12 rotate about a point, C-10 scale, C-7 subdivisions, C-4 trace status, C-3 translate, C-6 delta, C-6
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
IN-5
ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Index to a point, C-6 undo last, C-4 Translate reposition, 8-21, 8-22 transform, C-6
View, GL-9 Isometric, GL-5 Trimetric, GL-8 Work, GL-10
W
Trim, GL-8 Trim curve, D-49 Two curve fillet, create, D-36
U
WAVE, definition of, 3-8 WCS, 2-3, 3-3, GL-9 Dynamics, 2-10 Origin, 4-5 WCS Dynamics, 2-4
Undo, 1-26 Undo last, transform, C-4 Unigraphics, GL-9 Unite, 14-8
Work, destination layer, transform, C-3 Work Layer, GL-9 Work Part, 1-15, 8-16, GL-10
Units, GL-9 Inches, 1-9 Millimeters, 1-9 Unsuppress feature, 15-6
X XCĆAxis, GL-10
Update, 15-3 edit during update, 15-10
Y
Upgrade, Component, GL-9
YCĆAxis, GL-10
V
Z
Vectors, Defining of, 2-26 Version, GL-9
IN-6
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
ZCĆAxis, GL-10
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Reference Chart Tear Outs These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience.
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Student Profile Practical Applications of Unigraphics Name Employer U.S. citizen? Yes / No
Date
When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. We are concerned about providing training that meets your needs. If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form. 1. Job title: 2. Current responsibilities: 3. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______ 4. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______ 5. What other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar with? 6. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week? 7. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation, modeling, analysis, translation interface, etc.)? 8. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, floor plans, etc.)?
9. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT and CAST:
Course
Provider
10. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics disciplines listed below. none
novice
intermediate
advanced
future use
Wireframe Modeling Solid Modeling Parametric Modeling Drafting Assemblies Manufacturing
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Additional Comments
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Course Agenda
Day 1
Monday Morning Introduction & Overview Lesson 1. Getting Started Lesson 2. Introduction to Solid Modeling
Afternoon Lesson 3. Lesson 4. Lesson 5.
Form Features Expressions Face Operations
Lesson 6. Edge Operations Workbook Section 1 Project Description & Rear Differential Modeling
Day 2
Tuesday Morning Lesson 7.
Model Construction Query
Lesson 8. Introduction to Assemblies Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly Lesson 9. Master Model
Afternoon Lesson 10. Intro to Drafting Workbook Section 3 Rear Differential Drafting
Day 3
Wednesday Morning Lesson 11.
Datum Planes
Lesson 12. Datum Axes Workbook Section 4 Rear Axle Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting
Afternoon Lesson 13.
Day 4
Sketching
Thursday Morning Lesson 14. Swept Features & Boolean Operations Workbook Section 5 Power Pack Sketching
Afternoon Workbook Section 6 Workbook Section 7
Left Pinion Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting Rear Drive Gear Modeling
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Day 5
Friday Morning Lesson 15. Editing the Model Workbook Section 8 Part and Assembly Editing Lesson 16. Instance Arrays
Afternoon Workbook Section 9 Workbook Section 10
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Rear Drive Gear Completion Assembly Completion
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Class Layers and Categories The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry Object Type Solid Geometry InterĆpart Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies
Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100
Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS
Layer Assignment 101-110
Category Name FORMATS
Drafting Objects Object Type Drawing Borders
Engineering Disciplines Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools
Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150
Category Name MECH CAE
151-180 181-190
MFG QA
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Line, Arc, and Circle Creation Methods Line Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is usually not the only way the line may be created. Line between two points
Select two points
Line through a point and horizontal, vertical, or at an angle to the WCS
Y X
1
Line through a point and parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to a line
1 2
1
Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve
2
2 1
Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves
Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line
Define the first point Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or Enter the desired angle and press . Define a point Select a line Select limiting point/object [May also select line, then point]
Select a point Select a curve Select limiting point/object (if necessary)
Select two curves
2 1
A bisector line
Select two curves Select limiting point/object
Select two lines
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
Arc and Circle Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is usually not the only way the arc or circle can be created. Start point, end point, point on arc
3
2
Define first point Define second point Define third point
1
Start point, end point, tangent object
3
2
Define first point Define second point Select tangent object
1
Start point, tangent object, end point
1 3
2
Arc center, start point, end point
2
3
Define start point Select tangent object Define end point
Define first point Define second point Define third point
1
Circle center, point on circle
Define first point Define second point
2 1
Circle center, tangent object 1
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
2
EDS All Rights Reserved
Define point Select tangent object
Unigraphics NX
Hot Key Chart Hot Key CtrlĆA CtrlĆB CtrlĆC CtrlĆD CtrlĆE
Function Assembly Navigator Edit, Blank Copy Delete Tools, Expression
Hot Key CtrlĆN CtrlĆO CtrlĆP CtrlĆQ CtrlĆR
CtrlĆF CtrlĆG CtrlĆH CtrlĆI CtrlĆJ CtrlĆK CtrlĆL CtrlĆM
Fit View Grip Execute
CtrlĆS CtrlĆT CtrlĆU CtrlĆV CtrlĆW CtrlĆX CtrlĆY CtrlĆZ
Information, Object Edit, Object Display Format, Layer Settings Application, Modeling
EDS All Rights Reserved
Function File, New File, Open File, Plot View, Operation, Rotate (full menu) File, Save Edit, Transform Execute User Function Paste Application, Gateway Cut Edit, Undo
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
CtrlĆShiftĆA CtrlĆShiftĆB
CtrlĆShiftĆG CtrlĆShiftĆH
File, Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Edit, Blank, Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO All View, Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP CtrlĆShiftĆQ CtrlĆShiftĆR Format, Layout, Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Views Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU
CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆJ CtrlĆShiftĆK
CtrlĆShiftĆV CtrlĆShiftĆW CtrlĆShiftĆX
CtrlĆShiftĆC CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆF
Preferences, Object Edit, Blank, Unblank SeĆ lected
CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator
CtrlĆShiftĆY CtrlĆShiftĆZ
AltĆTab AltĆF4 F1
Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context
CtrlĆAltĆB CtrlĆAltĆC CtrlĆAltĆM
F3 F4 F5
View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh
CtrlĆAltĆN CtrlĆAltĆW CtrlĆAltĆX
F6 F7
Quick Zoom Quick Rotate
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Format, Layout, New Format, Layout, Open Tools, Macro, Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools, Macro, Record Toolsm Macro, Step Preferences, Selection Edit, Blank, Unblank All Of Part Format, Visible In View
View, Operation, Zoom (full menu)
Tools, Boundary Tools, CLSF Application ManufacturĆ ing Tools, Unisim Application Assemblies Tools, Lathe Cross-SecĆ tion
Unigraphics NX
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Training Course Evaluation Name (Optional) Instructor
Date Location
Unigraphics NX
Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class. Provide additional comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form. Please check the box if you would like your comments, regarding the training you just received, featured in our training publications. We will contact you if more information is needed. Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name What was your overall impression of this hotel?
Poor 2
3
4
5
6
7
Facilities - How would you rate the training facilities?
Poor 2
3
4
5
6
7
Instruction - How would you rate the instruction?
Poor 2
3
4
5
6
7
Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject?
Poor 2
3
4
5
6
7
Comments
1. Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Please explain:
Yes
No
2. Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand how to apply the software? No Please explain:
Yes
3. How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day activities? Please explain:
4. Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics? Please explain:
Yes
No
over
EDS All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
5. Was the workbook activity effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Please explain:
Yes
No
6. What additional topics related to parametric design would you like to see covered in this course? Please explain:
7. Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Please explain:
Yes
No
8. In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted; would you be willing to participate in this survey. (If you checked this box, make sure that your name is on this sheet.) Course - What was your overall impression?
Poor 2
3
4
5
6
7
Additional Comments
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual
EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
View more...
Comments
